JP2024090328A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To prevent misunderstanding by players. [Solution] In a gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game, a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying on a display device 41 a notification display (operating display 513) that notifies that a game-disabled state has occurred, and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c that notify that an error has occurred, and a signal output means (game control device 100) that outputs a signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10, the display control means being capable of simultaneously displaying the notification display (operating display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c, and the signal output means being capable of outputting a signal in response to the occurrence of a game-disabled state. [Selected Figure] Fig. 102

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are capable of displaying an error message to inform the player that an error has occurred (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-146854 A

When the occurrence of a predetermined state and an error occur at the same time, the player may be led to misinterpret the state of the gaming machine.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent misunderstandings by players.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine capable of executing a game,
a game stopping means capable of generating a game disabled state in which a game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A display control means capable of displaying, on a display device, a notification display notifying the occurrence of the game impossible state and an error display notifying the occurrence of an error;
A signal output means for outputting a signal to an outside of the gaming machine,
The display control means
The notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time,
The signal output means is
The device is characterized in that it is capable of outputting a signal in response to the occurrence of the unplayable state.

This invention makes it possible to prevent players from making mistakes.

1 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control system of a gaming machine. 1 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of a main process. 11 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the main process; 11 is a third flowchart showing the procedure of the main process; A diagram showing the RAM configuration of a gaming microcontroller. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device information initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a performance display editing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for an output process. A flowchart showing the steps of the prize slot switch/status monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the fraud and winning monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a winning number counter update process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a gaming machine status check process. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting change/confirmation process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of special game processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a start port switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of common processing of the special chart start port switch. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a specific area switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the small hit determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the support hit determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a special chart information setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a two-byte allocation process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a distribution process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a variable start information setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of processing during special chart change. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a time-saving end setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of a presentation mode information check process. A flowchart showing the steps of the first half of the processing during special chart display. A flowchart showing the steps of the latter half of the processing during special chart display. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a support operation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a bonus game process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of reels. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 1. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a general game process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a gate switch monitoring process. A flowchart showing the steps of the regular power winning switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the process for setting the transition to processing during normal map fluctuations. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map display. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a normal hit. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a normal power operation transition setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing normal residual balls. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal hit end processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second half of the external information editing process. 4 is a time chart showing a state in which external information or a test signal is transmitted. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a safety device-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for outside region integration processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a performance display device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the difference ball confirmation process. 5 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a safety device operation monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 13 is a flowchart showing pre-reading pattern command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern-related command process. 13 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a hit-related command. 13 is a table showing the state of devices related to performance according to the state of a safety device. 1 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order. 1 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order. 13 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display other than when waiting for customers. This is a diagram showing an example of an operation notice display before and after a reach during a changing display other than when waiting for customers. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation advance notice display while waiting for customers. FIG. 13 illustrates an example of a display screen of the display device in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing an example of a menu screen and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen; 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device, a menu screen, and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. FIG. 11 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device, a display, and a performance button. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device, a display, and a performance button. FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device and a menu screen. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between an operation movie and a menu screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the menu screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation display. 4 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a relationship between the operation of a safety device and an external signal. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation setting process performed by a performance control device. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power saving mode processing performed by a game control device. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power saving function setting process performed by a performance control device. A figure explaining a modified example of an error display during operation (when game play is stopped). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an error code. A figure explaining a modified ending presentation during an activation warning state. A figure explaining a modified ending presentation during an activation warning state.

Below, a preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that in the description of the gaming machine, front, back, left and right refer to the directions as seen by the player during play.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.
The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment and can be opened and closed by pivoting via hinges 16. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). The left end of the opening/closing frame is the shaft end attached to the hinge, and the right end is the open end that is opened by pivoting. The frame 11 and the front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 without opening the glass frame 15, the game control device (main board) 100 (see Figure 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30 can be accessed.

Various frame components are arranged around the edge of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

At the top center and on the right and left sides of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c that can emit light depending on the game status are arranged. The decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c house lighting components such as LEDs inside, and are performance devices that emit light depending on the game status. The lighting components arranged inside these decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c form part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

The decorative device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 at the top of the glass frame 15 (or the opening and closing frame) and protrudes diagonally upward toward the front. The decorative device 18a has a substantially flat front portion 456 that has various markings such as the model name. In this embodiment, the decorative device 18a is fixed and does not move, but it may protrude forward from its retracted initial position (normal position) only when necessary, or move up and down, to reduce the sense of oppression felt by the player.

Decorative device 18b is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative device 18c is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative devices 18b and 18c shine light toward the player toward the center (inside) of gaming machine 10, and light leaks out from multiple openings to the outside of gaming machine 10.

Upper speakers 19a are disposed in the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are disposed in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered by the right and left speaker decoration members 13, respectively.

An upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the bottom of the glass frame 15. The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape that is open at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball launching device.

The upper tray unit 20 further includes a presentation operation device that accepts input operations from the player, a ball dispensing operation device that accepts input operations from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs light-emitting effects and the like according to the game status.

The effect operation device is an operation device including the effect button 25, the cross key switch 28, and the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f, and is provided at the center of the top of the upper tray unit 20 and on its left side for easy operation by the player. The effect button 25 is placed in the opening of the operation panel 26 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 26. The operation panel 26 is capable of reflecting light by metal plating on its surface or being made entirely of metal, and has a metallic luster of, for example, silver. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 26, making the light-emitting effect of the effect button 25 more effective.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjust the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key switch 28 (cross key SW) is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f on the upper left side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the performance LED, for example. The cross key switch 28 may also be called a directional key switch, and may be a general one consisting of multiple (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, right, etc. For example, in a predetermined state such as waiting for customers and/or during play (during a game), the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f may be pressed down to adjust the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b, and the switch in front of or behind the cross key switch 28 may be pressed down to adjust the light amount (brightness, luminance) of the performance LED, etc. It is also possible to adjust the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b by pressing the left or right switch of the cross key switch 28 without providing the volume adjustment button switches 27e and 27f.

By operating the effect operation device (particularly the effect button 25), the player can perform effects that involve the player's operations in the special chart variable display game displayed on the display device 41 (see Figure 2). For example, it is possible to select a presentation pattern (presentation mode), or to execute a preview effect that notifies in advance the outcome of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes the special chart variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special chart variable display game.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed by the player operating the presentation operation device not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of multiple game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Special game states are, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (e.g., a jackpot) occurring in the variable display game is high (probability change state, probability change state), a jackpot state (special game state), and a small jackpot game state (small jackpot state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 has multiple game states with different probabilities of special results occurring, and the gaming control device 100 (game state selection means, setting means) can select (set) one game state from the multiple game states to set it as the current game state.

Here, the special probability state (specific game state) can be one that continues until the next big win occurs (loop type), one that continues until a specified number of variable display games have been played (number-cut type, ST), or one that continues until a specified probability of falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not a special state occurs may not be determined by the jackpot pattern random number, but the special state may always occur when a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device is equipped with a balance display section 27c, a ball lending button 27a, and a return button 27b. The balance display section 27c is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. The ball lending button 27a is a button operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and the return button 27b is a button operated by a player when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10.

The decorative device 22 is a device that contains lighting components such as LEDs and performs light-emitting effects depending on the game status, and is provided on the upper tray unit 20. The lighting components disposed inside the decorative device 22 form part of the frame decorative device 18 (see Figure 4).

Below the glass frame 15 which includes the above-mentioned upper tray unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is provided an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown), and a lower tray unit 29 which includes a lower tray 23 in which game balls can be stored. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side-by-side, stacked in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operating section 27d of the upper tray unit 20, the game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operating handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12, below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launching speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to be faster as the rotation amount of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the game area 32, in response to the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and can launch the game balls in various launch modes with different launching forces. The launch modes include a left hit (normal hit) in which the game balls flow down the left side of the game area 32, and a right hit in which the game balls flow down the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is disposed below the upper tray unit 20 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball ejection hole.

Also, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are arranged a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed on the island equipment, and a payout device (payout unit) that pays out game balls that flow down from the upper tank 448 onto the upper tray 21.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 comprises a flat game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various components. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front side of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play by launching game balls from a ball launcher into the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31. The game area 32 is provided with windmills, obstacle nails, and the like as components for changing the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these components.

A center case (front structure) 40 is attached in approximately the center of the play area 32, forming a window that serves as the display area for the variable display game. A display device 41 is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40, and serves as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (changeably displays) multiple pieces of identification information. The display device 41 is, for example, equipped with a liquid crystal display, and is disposed so that the display contents can be viewed from the front side of the play board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be one equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with multiple variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

The center case 40 is also provided with an inlet 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage section 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage section 40b of the center case 40 is located above the start winning opening 36, so game balls that roll on the stage section 40b are more likely to enter the start winning opening 36.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d form part of the board decoration device 46 (see Figure 4) and the board performance device 44 (see Figure 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal symbol start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol variation display game is executed.

General winning openings 35 are located in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and general winning openings 35 are also located in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The entry of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see Figure 3) provided on the general winning openings 35.

In the play area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port (start winning port 1, first start winning area) 36 that sets the start conditions for the special chart variable display game is provided. In the play area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning port (start winning port 2, second start winning area) is provided below the normal chart start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that rotates forward to change the state so that the game ball can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special chart variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. In addition, the game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hit from the left, and the game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hit from the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type normal electric device, and when the result of the normal variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) to open and change to an open state (an easy-to-win state that is advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy-to-win state), it will be in a closed state (a non-easy-to-win state, a difficult-to-win state) in which game balls cannot easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. In this embodiment, unlike the normal variable winning device 37, the start winning port 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but a configuration with a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which no special play is performed, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state).

In the game area 32 to the right of the starting winning hole 36, a first special variable winning device 38 (special electric device) is provided, which has an attacca-type opening and closing door 38c that opens the lower large winning hole by retracting it from the front to the back by the lower large winning hole solenoid 38b (see Figure 3). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning hole from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special chart variable display game, and by facilitating the flow of game balls into the lower large winning hole, it is designed to give the player a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of time-saving/probability-changing times after the end of a big win). In addition, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is arranged in the lower large winning hole as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the large winning hole. In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is more likely to have a winning ball when hit from the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, a second special variable winning device 39 is provided, which has an opening and closing door 39c that opens the upper large winning port by rotating the upper end side in a direction that falls to the right by an upper large winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). The second special variable winning device 39 converts the large winning port from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state that is advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special chart variable display game, and by facilitating the flow of game balls into the large winning port, it is designed to give the player a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of time-saving times/number of times of probability change after the end of a big win). In addition, an upper large winning port switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning port as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the large winning port. In addition, the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when hitting from the right.

Inside the second special variable winning device 39, a specific area 72 (so-called V winning port) is provided. If a game ball enters the specific area 72 (V winning port) after the opening and closing door 39c is opened by a small win, a big win is confirmed. The specific area 72 may be opened for a long time only during a small win, so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball into the specific area 72 (V winning) via a sensor (specific area switch 72a described later) or the like, and when it detects a V winning, it determines that the transition to a big win state will occur after the small win ends, and sends information indicating that a V winning has occurred (specific area passing command, etc.) to the performance control device 300 described later. The performance control device 300 can then notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine (type 1+2 machine). In this embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win, and the gaming ball V-enters a specific area 72 (V winning hole) in the second special variable winning device 39, resulting in a big win.

When a game ball enters the large winning port of the general winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port from the payout device to the upper tray 21. In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that did not enter the winning ports. In addition, the general winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (part of the board decoration device 46 described below) that can emit light when a game ball enters a winning port.

In addition, outside the play area 32, in the lower right corner of the play board main body 30a, there is provided a collective display device 50 that executes the special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and the normal chart change display game. The collective display device 50 is equipped with display units 51-60 that are composed of LED lamps (light-emitting units, light-emitting members) and display information such as the current play status.

The collective display device 50 has a first special chart change display section 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display section 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for the change display game, which are composed of 7-segment displays (LED lamps), a change display section 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the normal chart change display game, and a memory display section (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each change display game. The special chart 1 hold display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special chart 2 hold display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal chart hold display 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

The collective display device 50 also has a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that indicates whether it is time to hit from the right (when you should hit from the right) or the left (when you hit normally), a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs to indicate the occurrence of the time-saving state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability state display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state of a jackpot is in a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D6) that indicates the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38, 39 are opened and closed).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinked). The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment-type display unit, and may be composed of a collection of multiple LEDs. When executing the variable display, all LEDs provided as the display may be turned on and off (all LEDs blink simultaneously), or cyclically lit (lighting and turning off in a predetermined order starting from any one LED at a predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs among the multiple LEDs may be turned on and off (blinked) or cyclically lit. In the normal chart display 53, the variable display game is also executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. The normal chart display 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same way as the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 75 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that repeatedly turns on and off the symbols (fourth special symbol and fourth symbol described below), and lamp display units 3 to 6 (LEDs) that notify the start (pending) memory count of each special symbol variable display game. The lamp display device 75 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described below).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (e.g., 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are switched on and off at half the flashing cycle (e.g., 100 msec). While the variable display fluctuation time of the special chart 1 display unit 51, special chart 2 display unit 52, and regular chart display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the variable display time of the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 75 is measured by the performance control device 300 (described below).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (Special chart 1 reserved LED 1, Special chart 1 reserved LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 1 (first start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (Special chart 2 reserved LED 1, Special chart 2 reserved LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 2 (second start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. The lamp display units 3 to 6 stop displaying the reserved number when a jackpot occurs, but continue to display the reserved number when the jackpot state is not in progress (including when a reach occurs on the display unit 41, as described below).

Next, we will explain the game flow on the gaming machine 10, and the details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction due to obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and wins or enters the normal start gate 34, the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port is discharged to the upper tray 21 via the payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the judgment of the random number value for winning judgment that is extracted at this time.

When the normal map variation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variation display game has already been played and has not ended, or when the normal map variation display game has resulted in a win and the normal variation winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map start memory number (normal map reserve number) is less than the upper limit, the memory number is incremented (+1).

The normal map start memory (normal map reserve) stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map variation display game is a win or a loss, and when this random number value for determining a win matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and indicates a loss when unlit, and displays the variation of the normal identification information by flashing this LED, and displays the result by turning the LED on or off after a specified variation display time has elapsed.

If the normal symbol random number value extracted when passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol (normal symbol) displayed on the normal symbol display 53 stops in a winning state, and the winning state is reached. At this time, the normal symbol solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of a game ball into the start winning hole 36 and into the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the start winning hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start winning hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that enters the start winning hole 36 is detected as a start winning ball for the special chart 1 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and a game ball that enters the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball for the special chart 2 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the starting winning ball of the special chart change display game is detected, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the random number of each change pattern, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times) as special chart start winning memories in the special chart reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100. The number of special chart start winning memories is displayed on the special chart 1 reserve display 54 and the special chart 2 reserve display 55, which are used to notify the number of start winnings of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 variable display game on the special chart 1 display 51 based on a win in the start winning slot 36 or the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory, special chart 1 reserved). The game control device 100 also executes a special chart 2 variable display game on the special chart 2 display 52 based on a win in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserved).

The special chart 1 variable display game (first special chart variable display game) and the special chart 2 variable display game (second special chart variable display game) are played by displaying the identification information (special pattern, special chart) on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 in a variable manner, and then stopping to display a predetermined result pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special chart variable display game that variably displays multiple types of identification information (e.g., numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) corresponding to each special chart variable display game.

The decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41 starts displaying (scrolling) the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like described above in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol), and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are stopped one by one to display the result of the special symbol variation display game. In addition, the display device 41 displays a variety of effects such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) varies by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 75. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at "off" in the case of a miss, and at "on" in the case of a big win or small win.

When a game ball enters the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived from the displayed pattern as a result of the special pattern variable display game, and a jackpot state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a special result state (for example, a state in which the numbers "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize winning port from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) by energizing the large prize winning port solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). In other words, the large prize winning port provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls have won, and during this time the player is given the privilege of winning many game balls.

When a game ball enters the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a small win value), a specific result state (small win result state) is derived from the displayed pattern as a result of the special chart variable display game, and a small win state is achieved. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a small win result state. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small win, but the small win value (small win determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). Note that the total opening time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small win state (small win game state) than in the big win state (special game state), so the game value (number of balls acquired) that the player can acquire is less in the small win state than in the big win state. Note that the large prize opening is in an open state in both the small win state and the big win state, but the big win state may be called the first special game state and the small win state may be called the second special game state. For simplicity's sake, this embodiment describes a configuration in which only the special variable winning device 39 (upper large winning port) is converted to an open state in a small win state, and only the special variable winning device 38 (lower large winning port) is converted to an open state in a big win state (including a big win state due to a V win during a small win).

Here we explain the difference between a big win and a small win.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a condition device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a condition device. The condition device is operated when a big win occurs in a special chart variable display game (stop display of a big win pattern), and the operation of the condition device means, for example, that a big win state occurs and a specific flag is set to continuously operate the special variable winning devices 38, 39 as special electric roles. In addition, the operation of the condition device may mean that a game ball has passed through the specific area 72 (V winning). The non-operation of the condition device means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of simply winning a small win lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V winning during a small win state, the condition device will be operated. The "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. In addition, the term "condition device" is a commonly used term in the field of pachinko machines to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of an electric device, and is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the big win flag is set and the special variable prize device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, the small win flag is set and the special variable prize device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or as the same display, but are set so that the special chart change display games are not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 change display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 change display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game, and when it becomes possible to execute the special chart change display game, the special chart 2 change display game is executed (special chart 2 reserved consumption with priority, special chart 2 priority change).

For the decorative special chart change display game on the display device 41, the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special chart change display games corresponding to the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may not be executed simultaneously.

In the following explanation, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart change display game.

Although not limited to these, the start port 1 switch 36a in the start port 36, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a and 39a use non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) that have a magnetic detection coil and detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Also, a microswitch with mechanical contacts can be used for the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main frame opening detection switch 64 (front frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12.

[Game Control Device]
3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is equipped with a game control device 100 (main board), which is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes an amusement microcomputer (CPU) 111, known as an amusement chip (IC), and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that has an oscillator such as a crystal resonator and generates the CPU's operating clock, timer interrupts, and a clock that serves as a reference for the random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, or DC 5V, generated by the power supply device 400, to enable them to operate.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as 12V DC or 5V DC from a voltage of 32V DC, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage, and a control signal generation unit 430 that has a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integral with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing models, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board, as in the embodiment, they are not subject to replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of a single large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control device 100, so that data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generating unit 430, for example, monitors the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time. It also outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The gaming control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not limited to this, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power outage monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 153. The setting key switch 153 is turned on by the operator's rotation operation or the like to make the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting related to the game conditions (game) changeable. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big win or a small win, but other game conditions other than the probability (such as performance) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. For example, the winning probability may be increased as the probability setting value increases. The setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting change means (setting change device, setting means) that can change the setting related to the game conditions (probability setting value). It is to be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a unique setting value change switch may be provided for exclusive use.

The setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are positioned in a position that cannot be operated (inaccessible position) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As described below, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered from a power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 can transition to various states, such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (set) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, depending on the on/off state of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

In this embodiment, the probability setting values are defined in, for example, six stages: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the setting that is most unfavorable to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most favorable to the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed as follows: setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For the sake of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), working setting values 0 to 5 are set corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, but the working setting value and the probability setting value may be treated as the same by aligning them to the same numerical range (i.e., 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

In addition, instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 153 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. The probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed on the performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including dot Dp). Information on the setting value such as the display probability setting value (for example, a display that can read the probability setting values 1 to 6) may be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50). Information on the setting value such as the display probability setting value may be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50) not only during the setting variable state or the setting confirmation state, but also during game control execution (during execution of the game processing described below).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) in a non-volatile manner. RAM 111c is used as a working area for CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers, and stores information related to the game (game information), and serves as a storage means capable of retaining stored information even in the event of a power outage. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

The ROM 111b also stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that specifies, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the presentation content, and whether or not a reach state occurs. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table also includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables (such as a second half variation group table and a second half variation pattern selection table) for determining a second half variation pattern that is a variation pattern after a reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first half variation group table and a first half variation pattern selection table) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a variation pattern before a reach state is reached.

Here, the term "reach" (reach state) refers to a display state in which, in a gaming machine 10 having a display device with a variable display state, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and when the multiple display results become a predetermined special result mode, the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player. At a stage where some of the multiple display results have not yet been derived and displayed, the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the reach state refers to a display mode that does not deviate from the display conditions for becoming a special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. For example, a state in which a variable display is performed using multiple variable display areas while maintaining a state in which all special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state refers to the display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and at least some of the display results of the multiple variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed satisfy the conditions for a special result mode.

Therefore, for example, if the decorative special chart variable display game displayed on the display device in response to the special chart variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the variable display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the state in which the variable display stops in the left and right variable display areas when the conditions for a special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) is the reach state. Alternatively, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the reach state may be set to a state in which any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for a special result state (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state), and the remaining one variable display area may be displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set as reach effect types (types) with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode). The expectation (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special chart variable display game (when a jackpot occurs). In other words, it may also be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that a special result mode is not derived in the special chart variable display game (when a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is a state with a higher possibility of a jackpot than when a reach state does not occur.

The expected degree of a performance (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that performance is selected, and can be calculated based on the selection rate of that performance when there is a jackpot and the selection rate of that performance when there is no jackpot (when there is a miss).

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, thereby controlling the entire gaming machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a random number generation circuit for generating a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special chart variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern random number for determining the small jackpot pattern, a support hit pattern random number for determining the time-saving pattern (stop pattern for a support hit) described below, and a variable pattern random number for determining the variable pattern in the special chart variable display game (including the execution time of the variable display game in various reaches and no reaches), and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that provides the update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.

In addition, in processing related to the special chart variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables based on the game result (jackpot or miss) of the special chart variation display game, the probability state of the special chart variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the start memory number, etc. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition means that acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special chart variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and performs control to pay out prize balls. The payout control device 200 also drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control to pay out loan balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is connected to a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the second start port 37 (normal variable winning device), a winning port switch 35a of the normal winning port 35, and large winning port switches 38a, 39a of the special variable winning devices 38, 39. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided that receives negative logic signals such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts them into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Furthermore, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72a, the remaining ball outlet switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72a detects the passage (V entry) of a game ball into the specific area 72 (V entry port). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball outlet that discharges game balls from the special variable entry devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished playing (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the entry port or out port 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a and 39a are input into the third input port 124.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72a, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud and provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a main frame opening detection switch 64 (front frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like, and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibrations of the gaming machine 10.

The second input port 123 also receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 153 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

In addition, the output of the proximity I/F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As mentioned above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable this level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation.

The data held by the third input port 124 can be read by the gaming microcontroller 111 asserting (changing to an active level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described below.

The input section 120 is also provided with a first input port 122 that takes in the following signals output from the payout control device 200: a frame radio wave illegal signal, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, a touch switch signal based on the input of a touch switch provided on the operating handle 24, and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112, and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that is, the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame), and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands.

The input section 120 is also provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals. The power outage monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches mentioned above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is input directly to a reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RST is also configured to be output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may also be configured to be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 of the input unit 120. The data set by the gaming microcomputer 111 to each port of the output unit 130 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input is discarded by the reset of the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the presentation control device 300 and on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200 via serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication that prevents signals from being input from the presentation control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

In addition, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the special pattern information of the variable display game and signals indicating the probability of a jackpot to a test firing test device of a certification agency (not shown) via a relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in an amusement facility. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing device as they are, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and are then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 for outputting opening/closing data for the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c, which is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, the lower large winning port solenoid 38b (large winning port solenoid 1) which opens the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port solenoid 39b (large winning port solenoid 2) which opens the second special variable winning device 39, and the lever solenoid 72b which operates the lever to open the specific area 72.

The output unit 130 also has a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data for the segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a fourth output port 136 for outputting on/off data for the digit lines to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 are connected.

The output unit 130 also has a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data for a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, and a seventh output port 142 for outputting on/off data for a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the performance display device 152 is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device for the gaming facility (hall computer)) installed in the gaming facility, so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. A launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

The output section 130 further includes a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives opening/closing data signals from the regular solenoid 37c and the special prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current draw side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.

The output section 130 further includes a performance display segment driver 150a that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141, and a performance display digit driver 150b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply unit 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The second driver 138b, which drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50, is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, is intended to draw current through the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b outputs 12V and feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c outputs ground potential and draws current from the cathode terminal through the digit line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected sequentially by the dynamic drive method in the collective display device 50 and lights them up. The performance display segment driver 150a outputs 12V and feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b outputs ground potential and draws current from the cathode terminal through the digit line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected sequentially by the dynamic drive method in the performance display device 152 and lights them up. The fourth driver 138d outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 and is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the main board.

The output unit 130 is further provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and programs of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data with the inspection device 500 via serial communication. Note that such data transmission and reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, as with a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore no ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of multiple (four) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) displays (LED lamps), and the performance display drivers 150a and 150b are LED drivers, but are not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided elsewhere. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a role ratio, a payout rate, and the number of balls discharged.

The number of ejected balls here is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls), and is the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the winning port (number of winning balls) and the number of game balls that passed through the out port 30b. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc. In this embodiment, the winning ports include the general winning port 35, the start winning port 36 (first start winning port, start port 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port, start port 2), and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 (large winning ports).

The ball output rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of winning balls to the number of balls dispensed (or the number of balls fired into the play area 32), and is calculated as (number of balls acquired ÷ number of balls dispensed) × 100 (%). In other words, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) per 100 balls dispensed.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize slot during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize slot during a specified period (e.g., from when the gaming machine 10 was turned on to the present) (= so-called continuous role ratio). Note that the role ratio may be the percentage of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot (during a jackpot state and during a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls (= large prize slot ratio), or it may be the percentage of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot and a normal variable prize slot 37 (second start prize slot) (= the commonly used so-called role ratio (total role ratio)).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also functions as a safety device. The safety device is a game stopping means (stopping means) that can generate a game stop state (game not possible state, game prohibited state) in which games such as the special chart change display game, the normal chart change display game, and round play (play during a big win or a small win) cannot be executed by establishing an operating condition (predetermined condition) based on the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls. In the game stop state, a new special chart change display game and a new normal chart change display game cannot be started. The safety device can take appropriate measures against fraud in cases where the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and may also be able to suppress players' addiction to the game.

In this embodiment, the safety device is a function realized by software (program) in the game control device 100, and is also called a completion function (or an ending function, a stop function). Of course, the safety device may also be provided as hardware such as an electrical circuit or a circuit board.

In this embodiment, the operating conditions of the safety device are (1) that the number of balls difference, which indicates the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls, reaches a ball difference reference value (predetermined value), and (2) that the game is neither a big win nor a small win. The number of balls difference is the number of safe balls minus the number of discharged balls (number of balls difference = number of safe balls - number of discharged balls). In this way, the operating conditions of the safety device consist of two stages of conditions (1) and (2). Other operating conditions are also possible, and for example, the condition (1) can be configured so that the number of safe balls reaches a predetermined value. Also, the condition (2) can be configured so that the special variable prize device is not operating, or the big prize opening is not in an open state.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is the total number of prize balls (number of won balls, balls dispensed) that have been determined to be paid out during a specified period. If there is an error in the payment of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls that have been determined to be paid out will not be equal to the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device, but the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out may be measured using a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. In addition, the number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area 32, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

In addition, the number of launched balls, which is the number of launched balls launched and introduced into the play area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference in the number of launched balls may be the number of safe balls minus the number of launched balls. The number of launched game balls and the number of ejected balls may be collectively referred to as the number of used balls (difference in the number of balls = number of safe balls - number of used balls). Foul balls that were launched by the ball launcher but did not reach the play area 32 are excluded from the number of launched balls, and the difference in the number of balls is deducted by -1 for each game ball launched by the ball launcher and added by +1 for each foul ball. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of launched balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the play area 32, i.e., near the upper end of the guide path for launched game balls on the game board 30.

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the performance control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram of the performance control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 is equipped with a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, which is an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 111, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphics processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a, 19b.

Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores the programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a working area, an FeRAM 323 that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power outage, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

The main control microcomputer 311 is also connected to a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the display content, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the sound to be played, turns on decorative lamps, controls the drive of motors and solenoids, and manages the presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. Also connected to the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326 that is used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.

Although not limited to this, data is sent and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

The VDP 312 inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal STS for providing the timing for transmitting data. In addition, the VDP 312 also inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 interrupt signals INT0-n for notifying the processing status, such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT for notifying the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data.

The performance control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be sent to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 consisting of an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The presentation control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100. The presentation control device 300 receives the number of reserved decorative special symbols commands, decorative special symbol commands, fluctuation commands, stop information commands, etc. sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 as presentation control command signals (presentation commands) via the command I/F 331. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates on DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the presentation control device 300 operates on DC 3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The presentation control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (such as the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a board presentation movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board presentation device 44 (such as a movable role that enhances the presentation effect in cooperation with the presentation display on the display device 41) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 75 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334, which drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may also be provided.

The performance control device 300 also has a function of detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, the cross key switch 28, the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f, and the performance element switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 also has a switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided on the performance control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply unit 400 is configured to generate a voltage of DC 32V to drive motors and solenoids, DC 12V to drive the display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V to serve as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and DC 15V to drive motors, LEDs and speakers in order to supply the desired level of DC voltage to the performance control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 to generate DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generating unit 430 of the power supply unit 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, which resets the device. It is also output from the main control microcomputer 311 and supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., which reset these. A cooling fan 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, the game control performed by these control circuits will be explained. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal game is a hit based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal game start gate 34, compares it with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b, and judges whether the normal game is a hit or a miss in the normal game variation display game.

Then, the normal map display 53 displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then the normal map variation display game is displayed in a stationary manner. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, a special result state is displayed on the normal map display 53, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times) as described above. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). Note that, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result state on the normal map display 53.

In addition, the start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start hole 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning hole 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in ROM 111b to judge whether the special chart 1 variable display game is a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided on the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in ROM 111b to judge whether the special chart 2 variable display game is a win or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the judgment result of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. Then, the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 display a special chart variable display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then the special chart variable display game is displayed in a stationary manner. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

In addition, the performance control device 300 displays a decorative special chart variable display game corresponding to the special chart variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

When the result of the special chart variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result state on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to open the opening/closing doors 38c, 39c of the special variable winning devices 38, 39, for example, by the large winning port solenoids 38b, 39b, allowing game balls to flow into the large winning port.

Then, one round (R) is defined as the opening of the large prize opening until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening. This is controlled (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle play). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result state becomes a special result state. Also, when the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, control is performed to display the miss result state on the special chart 1 display 51 or the special chart 2 display 52.

The game control device 100 can also generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result state of the special chart variable display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special chart variable display game is higher than the normal probability state. Furthermore, regardless of whether the high probability state is reached based on the result state of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game will be in a high probability state.

The game control device 100 can also generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result state of the special chart variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal chart variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal power support state is entered by controlling the normal chart variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 to be open for a substantially longer period of time per unit time than in a normal game state in which no special game is being played. Note that even in a high probability state (normal probability state) other than the latent probability state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the special chart change display game (special chart change time) can be made shorter than usual, and time-saving changes in the special chart change display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number) for one winning result of the normal variable display game to a second opening number (e.g., four times) that is greater than the first opening number (e.g., two times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the probability of a winning result of the normal variable display game (normal probability, normal winning probability) to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time-saving state, the time for converting the normal variation winning device 37 to the open state is extended more than usual by changing one or more of the normal chart variation time, normal chart stop time, normal power opening count, normal power opening time, and normal chart probability. As a result, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which no special play is performed, and the number of times the special chart variation display game is executed per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. It is also possible to set the movable member 37b not to be opened in the normal operation state (normal chart probability is 0). In addition, when a hit is made, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. In addition, the high probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently of each other, and both can occur simultaneously, or only one can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 153 are turned on or off to transition to one of four states (modes).

When the power is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 153 are turned on, the system transitions to a setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (set) (see steps X30 to X39 in Figure 6 and Figure 17).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 153 is on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (see steps X34 to X39 in Figure 6 and Figure 17).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 153 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the system transitions to a RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see steps X45 to X47 in FIG. 6).

When the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the device will enter the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) and will simply be in a state where power is restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine for performing such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main process shown in Figures 5, 6, and 7, and the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 11, which is performed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. Figures 5, 6 and 7 are flow charts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (step X1). It then executes a stack pointer setting process to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area to which values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs (step X2).

Next, register bank 0 is specified as the register bank to be used (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specific register (step X4). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch stop signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X6). In other words, it reads the signals from the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (step X7). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power-on delay timer, a waiting time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the programs of the slave control means (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) that perform various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the master control means are started normally. This makes it possible to avoid the slave control device missing the command if the game control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) starts up. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a waiting means that delays the start of the master control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined waiting time to wait for the start of the slave control device (the payout control device 200, the presentation control device 300, etc.).

The power-on delay timer also uses memory areas (RAM areas or registers not subject to validity checks) that are not subject to validity checks (checksum calculations). This eliminates the need to exclude part of the RAM area when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, preventing the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that by reading the states of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. In other words, if the states of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the states before the start of the standby time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on is not accepted, without having to perform such troublesome operations.

When the power-on delay timer is set (step X7), the game control device 100 performs a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (steps X8 to X10).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus (step X8). If a power outage has occurred (step X8; Y), the game control device waits until the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

If no power outage has occurred (step X8; N), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (step X9) and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), i.e., if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to step X8.

In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a specified standby time. This makes it possible to respond to a power outage that occurs during the period when the start-up of the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and malfunctions at power-on can be dealt with appropriately. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the contents stored at the time of the previous power outage remain retained, so there is no need to perform backup processing or the like when a power outage occurs here. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), i.e., if the waiting time has ended, the game control device 100 allows access to readable and writable RWM (read-write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X11) and outputs off data to all output ports (setting them to a state of no output) (step X12).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, and in this embodiment, is used for communication with the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13).

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (step X14). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency division circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (e.g., 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal, and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) (step X15). Here, a flag indicating an abnormality is temporarily set in a specified register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (step X16). If it is normal (step X16; Y), it determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (step X17).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process to calculate a checksum of a specified area in the RWM (e.g., a work area within the area) (step X18), and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power outage (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating a RAM abnormality is cleared (step X20). Then, the process proceeds to step X21.

In addition, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), or if the checksums do not match (step X19; N), it proceeds to processing of step X21 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If both switches are on (step X21; Y), the game control device 100 transitions to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the processing during the probability setting change in steps X30 to X40.

When at least one of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it determines whether or not a probability setting change flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting change flag is not set (step X23; N), it executes the process during probability setting confirmation (in setting confirmation state, in setting confirmation mode) of steps X34 to X40, the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) of steps X44 to X47, or the process at normal power-on (when power is restored) of steps X44 and steps X48 to X51.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (step X23; Y), the game control device 100 transmits a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (step X24). The presentation control device 300, which has received the main abnormality error notification command, notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 to display it on the performance display device 152 (step X25). Then, it outputs security signal ON data to notify an external device (such as an amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) or information collection terminal) of the abnormality to the external information terminal 71 (step X26). Note that even if information about the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state. After that, it waits by repeating the processing of steps X25 and X26, and again performs the setting change operation (ON operation of both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112) and waits for the power to be turned on. In addition, while the processes of steps X25 and X26 are repeated and waiting, interrupts remain prohibited (step X1), and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) that can execute the special chart game process and the normal chart game process cannot be executed, so games (special chart change display game, normal chart change display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the probability setting change flag is set even though the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112) has not been performed, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and the processing of steps X24 to X26 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting change flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed.

On the other hand, even if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), the game control device 100 sends a main abnormality error notification command to the performance control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (step X24), outputs the 7-segment display data at the time of game stop (data displaying the "E1" error) to the drivers 150a, 150b of the performance display device 152 (step X25), and outputs on data of the security signal to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device of the RAM abnormality (step X26). As described above, even if information regarding the jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the off state.

Then, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred (step X27), and if a power outage has not occurred (step X27; N), the process of steps X25 and X26 is repeated and the machine waits. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred (step X27; Y), off data is output to all output ports (step X28), and access to readable and writable RWMs (read-write memories) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (step X29). The machine then waits until the power to the machine is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state) and first determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X30). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X30; Y), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (step X31), and then the probability setting change flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (step X32). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X30; N), the probability setting value is not cleared, and the probability setting change flag is set (step X32). Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (step X33), and the process proceeds to step X37. In addition, when the performance control device 300 receives a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed, it notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

When at least one of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), and the probability setting change flag is not set (step X23; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 153 is on (step X34). When the setting key switch 153 is on (step X34; Y), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the process of checking the probability setting (in the setting check state) begins, and the probability setting check flag indicating that the probability setting is being checked is set (step X35). Then, the game control device 100 sends a command for checking the probability setting to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (step X36), and proceeds to the process of step X37. The performance control device 300 that receives the command for checking the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being checked.

After step X33 or step X36, the game control device 100 executes steps X37 to X43 as common processing during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (a predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed (step X37). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 17) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (step X119). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (step X38). This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) to be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 153 is off (step X39). If the setting key switch 153 is on (step X39; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X40). If a power outage has not occurred (step X40; N), the process returns to step X39. On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X40; Y), the process for when a power outage occurs in steps X63 to X69 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 153 is on and no power outage has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, will continue.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 153 is off (step X39; Y), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (step X41) and sends a notification end command to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (step X42). Note that upon receiving the notification end command, the presentation control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting is being checked or that the probability setting is being changed.

The game control device 100 then determines whether the probability setting change flag is set, i.e., whether the probability setting has been changed up until now (step X43). If the probability setting change flag is set (step X43; Y), i.e., if the probability setting has been changed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the RAM initialization process (described below) of steps X45 to X47. On the other hand, if the probability setting change flag is not set (step X43; N), i.e., if the probability setting has been confirmed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the normal process at power-on (power restoration) from step X48 onwards.

When the setting key switch 153 is off (step X34; N), the game control device 100 judges whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X44). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X44; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value in the RAM 111c are cleared to 0 (step X45). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Here, the probability setting change flag described above is also cleared here. In addition, the number of acquired game balls area that stores the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of prize balls (total) acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one interruption of the timer interrupt), is also cleared to 0. Then, the safety device operation flag area that stores the safety device operation flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is in operation is also cleared to 0 (safety device operation flag = 0), and the operation of the safety device is released. In step X45, the safety device is deactivated by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0 in both the RAM clear with setting change (step X43; Y) and the RAM clear without setting change (step X44; Y), but this may be limited to one of them.

In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure the system so that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or so that the performance display work area (part of the outside work area) and stack area (outside stack area) related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. Note that performance information is derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and is, for example, the payout rate, base value (payout rate in normal gameplay), role ratio, and number of balls dispensed.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X46). Then, it transmits the command at the time of RAM initialization to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (step X47), and proceeds to the processing of step X52.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X44; N), the game control device 100 starts the normal power-on (power recovery) process because both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, and saves the initial value at the time of power recovery (power restoration) in the area to be initialized as the power outage recovery process (step X48). The probability setting confirmation flag described above is also cleared here. Note that, unlike the RAM initialization, the safety device operation flag area is not cleared at the time of normal power-on. Also, the ceiling counter area in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed in a state other than the probability variation state is stored does not need to be cleared so as not to cause a disadvantage to the player. Next, a power outage recovery command corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special chart game processing described later is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (step X49), and the process proceeds to step X50.

The commands sent in step X47 for initializing the RAM and in step X49 for restoring the power outage include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2, a probability information command indicating the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, a performance count information command indicating the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed in a specified performance mode, and a power outage recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for initializing the RAM and the command for restoring power after a power outage include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) that indicates setting value information (setting information), which is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter the presentation control device 300 can control the presentation by referring to the setting value information stored in itself.

The command for initializing the RAM also includes a command for initializing the RAM (a command for clearing the RAM). When the performance control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM, it displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the user of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) for 30 seconds using the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speakers 19a, 19b. The command for recovering from a power outage also includes a screen designation command that specifies the display content on the screen of the display device 41. The screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command for both special charts 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor winning), and can be a recovery screen command at other times.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (step X50). For example, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation when the safety device in operation flag "1" is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as the safety device in operation flag (safety device in operation flag = 1). Then, if the safety device is in operation (step X50; Y), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (step X51), and processing proceeds to step X52. If the safety device is not in operation (step X50; N), processing proceeds directly to step X52.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is pushed to the internal stack area (step X52), and a safety device information initialization process is executed to initialize the safety device information related to the safety device (such as the safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and old operation information described below) (step X53). After that, the information of the flag register is restored (POP) (step X54). Note that, except when game play is stopped due to a RAM abnormality (steps X25 to X29), the safety device information (such as the safety device counter value) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on, but if a count continuation switch is provided and the power is turned on while pressing the count continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

As described below, when the process transitions to the safety device information initialization process, the stack pointer is switched from an in-area stack area related to game control to an out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags (especially the zero flag) in the flag register will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of RAM 111c, the flag register information is saved in advance in step X52. The flag register is an 8-bit flag in which each bit takes the value of 0 or 1. Note that the flag register disclosed in JP 2013-233299 A, JP 2018-94101 A, etc. can be used.

Next, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (step X55). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a specified register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. In this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers, small winning pattern random numbers, support winning pattern random numbers, etc.), normal winning random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as random numbers updated only by hardware. These random numbers may be so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the operating clock.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, by swapping the bits of the random numbers according to a bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers and increase the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a number of patterns prepared in advance. It may also be possible for the user to set it arbitrarily.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (step X56) and determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X57). It can determine that the game is stopped when a safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 (described later) occurs that requires the game (such as a special game with a variable pattern display, a regular game with a variable pattern display, or a round game) to be stopped.

When the game is not stopped (step X57; N), the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the information (value) of the flag register to the in-area stack area (step X58) and executes a performance display editing process to calculate performance information such as a base value (ball payout rate) (step X59). Here, performance information (such as the ratio of the role and the ball payout rate) may be calculated. In addition, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), this may be cleared. After that, the information of the flag register is restored (POP) (step X60) and an interrupt is permitted (step X61). In addition to the case where no error has occurred, if a weak error (described later) or strong error 1 (described later), which is an error other than strong error 2, has occurred, the game is not stopped, and the processing of steps X58 to X60, including the performance display editing process, is executed. Note that it is also possible to configure the processing of steps X58 to X60 not to be executed when a weak error or strong error 1 has occurred.

As described below, when moving to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags (especially the zero flag) in the flag register will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of RAM 111c, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step X58.

On the other hand, when play is stopped (step X57; Y), the game control device 100 allows an interrupt (step X61) without executing the performance display editing process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (particularly the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as the base value is not newly calculated and does not change. Note that it is also possible to configure the device to execute the performance display editing process, etc. without stopping play, even when strong error 2 occurs. Also, by allowing the interrupt, it becomes possible to execute the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

In this embodiment, errors are divided into three categories: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. When the performance control device 300 receives an error/illegal command, it can set and execute error notifications of different strengths corresponding to weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/illegal setting process (step S156).

For example, the performance control device 300 may increase the volume of the error notification sound from the speakers 19a, 19b, or the brightness (luminance) of the LEDs (performance LEDs of the board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18) that light up to notify errors in the order of weak error < strong error 1 ≦ strong error 2. The speaker volume or LED brightness for strong error 1 and strong error 2 may be the same. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 may set the volume of the notification sound to the volume adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (step S11) (lower than maximum volume) when a weak error occurs, and set the volume of the notification sound to maximum volume when strong error 1 and strong error 2 occur.

Weak errors include a shoot ball out error in which a shoot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow error in which an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 being full. In the case of a weak error, an external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see Figure 59). Weak errors may also include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main frame opening error (front frame opening error). In strong error 1, a door/frame opening signal (step X505) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see Figure 59).

Strong error 2 is an error related to fraud and preferably causes the game to be stopped, and includes magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge error, V-pass error, big prize entry port fraud, and regular power fraud. In strong error 2, a security signal (step X522) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see FIG. 59). Strong error 2 may also include a remaining ball error. When strong error 2 occurs, the game (special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, round game, etc.) is stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (step X57). Also, when strong error 2 occurs, it is possible to generate a game stop state (unplayable state, game prohibited state) in which the special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, round game (play during a big win or a small win), etc. cannot be executed as games, just like when the safety device is activated.

After step X61, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (step X62). If a power outage has not occurred (step X62; N), the process returns to step X56. This causes the loop process of steps X56 to X62 to be repeated until a power outage occurs. And until a power outage occurs, performance information such as base values can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (step X59) as long as game play is not stopped, that is, as long as a safety device is not activated or strong error 2 is not generated.

The repetition period of the loop process is much shorter than the timer interrupt period (a predetermined time period, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt period. Therefore, if a game ball wins or there is a change in the number of balls discharged (a game ball entering the outlet 30b), the performance information such as the base value can change immediately.

When a power outage occurs (step X62; Y), the gaming control device 100 starts processing for when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (step X63), and outputs off data to all output ports (step X64). After that, it saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (step X65), and saves power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (step X66). It then executes a checksum calculation process to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step X67), and further saves the calculated checksum (step X68). Finally, it executes a process to prohibit access to the RWM (step X69), and waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power interruption, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

The main processing has been described above, but for example, if the setting key switch and RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps X56 to X62, a determination process similar to that of step X21 may be performed, and the probability setting change flag may be set similar to that of step X32, making it possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the gaming machine 10 is running.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
Fig. 8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in Fig. 8, an in-area work area, an unused area, an in-area stack area, an unused area, an outside-area work area, an unused area, and an outside-area stack area are arranged from the top address of the RAM 111c. The unused area between the in-area work area and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control, stack area for in-area) and the unused area between the outside-area work area and the outside-area stack area (stack area for outside-area) may not be required.

The RAM's in-area work area (game control work area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by in-area programs and read by out-area programs. The in-area work area includes a probability setting value area, test signal output data area, random number area, switch control area, segment area, power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, checksum area, etc., as well as a safety device operation flag area that indicates whether the safety device is in operation or not, and a number of acquired game balls area that stores the number of acquired game balls acquired as prize balls within one timer interrupt (e.g. 4 msec).

The outside work area of the RAM is an area that is read and written by the outside program and read by the inside program. The outside work area includes a safety counter area that stores the safety counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) corresponding to the difference in number of balls, a safety device operation information area that stores safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device, and an old operation information area that stores old operation information, and can store safety device information related to the safety device. The safety device counter area (3 byte size) is basically not read by the inside program, but when the safety device counter value or information on the difference in number of balls is sent to the performance control device 300 by a difference in ball command, it may be read and referenced by the inside program. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the difference in number of balls in proportion to the difference in number of balls (safety device counter value = difference in number of balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this as long as it corresponds to the difference in number of balls and indicates the difference in number of balls.

Furthermore, the out-of-area work area includes a work area for performance display related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. In addition, the out-of-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In the out-of-area work area, the safety device-related work area related to safety device information (including the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and previous operation information area) and the performance display work area related to performance information and performance display may be clearly separated or may be mixed.

The out-of-area stack area is shared when processing performance information and performance display, and when processing safety devices. The out-of-area stack area is also used when processing test signals and error monitoring.

Note that in-area programs (programs for in-area processing) and out-area programs (programs for out-area processing) are distinguished by being arranged with unused areas between them in ROM 111b. The in-area programs in the ROM consist of game control programs and game control data, and include a main program corresponding to the main processing (FIGS. 5 to 7) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing described below. Subroutines of the main program or the interrupt processing program may also be out-area programs. The out-area programs in the ROM include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program equivalent to the performance display editing processing, and an out-area integration processing program corresponding to the out-of-area integration processing described below.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, the safety device information initialization process (step X53) in the main process will be described in detail. Fig. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device information initialization process. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, the safety device operation information area, and the old operation information area are initialized or cleared, and the safety device information such as the safety device counter value, the safety device operation information, and the old operation information is set to an initial value (initial information). Note that the safety device operation information is information indicating the current state, and the old operation information indicates the state of the previous time (mainly one interrupt before).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (step X71), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) to the stack pointer as the value of the external stack area (external stack area) (step X72). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) to the external stack area (step X73). The registers to be saved may be only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) them to both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (step X74). When the difference in the number of balls decreases from 0, such as when no jackpot occurs, the safety device counter value (= difference in the number of balls + initial value) may become smaller than the initial value, so the initial value is set to be greater than 0, but may be a value other than 100,000. Note that, in this way, when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player, but the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed in a state other than the probability change state does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. Then, the safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (step X75). Furthermore, the safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (step X76).

The game control device 100 then restores the saved registers (step X77), loads them from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (step X78), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if information is written directly to RAM without using a register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, the register is not saved to RAM, so stack pointer-related processes (steps X71, X72, X73, X77, X78) are not required. In addition, saving/restoring the flag register before and after the safety device information initialization process (steps X52, X54) is also not required.

In this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189999), the safety device operation information becomes safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operation state (operation notice state, operation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not operated (normal)) in which the safety device is not operated (normal). When the safety device counter value is 190000 to 194999 (safety device counter = 190000 to 194999), the safety device operation information becomes safety device operation notice information (value 1) corresponding to the operation notice state that warns the operation of the safety device.

In addition, when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) but the game is not yet in a state where it can be stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation warning information (value 2) corresponding to an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device. In this case, even if the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the difference in ball reference value of 95,000, since a big win or a small win is occurring, this corresponds to a case where the above-mentioned condition (1) is met but condition (2) is not met and the activation condition of the safety device is not met.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) and gameplay is stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation information (value 3) corresponding to the activation state (activating state) in which the safety device is activated. In this case, the difference in number of balls has reached the difference in balls reference value of 95,000, and there is neither a big win nor a small win, so both of the above-mentioned conditions (1) and (2) are met, which corresponds to the case in which the activation condition for the safety device is met.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, the performance display editing process (step X59) in the main process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (step X81), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (step X82). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (step X83). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a validity check is performed to determine the validity of the performance display work area within the external work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including setting the initial value) (step X84).

In the validity judgment, if the value stored in the performance display work area is a value that is impossible in terms of design or deviates from the design value (if it is outside a specified range), it can be judged to be invalid. For example, it is judged whether a specific value (e.g., 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialization flag, which indicates that the performance display work area has been initialized, whether the number that manages the progress of the division process used for base value calculation, etc. is within a specified range, whether the switch counter value is within a range equal to or less than the number of switches to be monitored, whether the display period management number indicating the current display period is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and whether the tally period number indicating the current tally period is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 4). In this way, in the validity judgment, it is preferable to judge whether the value of the area used as a pointer to the data table is within a specified range. This makes it possible to prevent the program from running out of control by obtaining a value outside the range. In addition, it is effective because the validity judgment is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, since a validity check is performed each time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, and abnormal performance display (display of abnormal base values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized in order to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area and the in-area stack area.

The game control device 100 then determines whether it is time to switch the counting interval for counting the data (such as the number of normal out balls and the number of normal winning balls) that is the basis for calculating the base value (ball payout rate) (step X85). A counting interval is set for the total number of out balls (total number of discharged balls, total number of outs) since the power was turned on, and the counting interval is switched each time the total number of out balls reaches a number of predetermined numbers (for example, each time it increases by 60,000).

For example, the timing for switching tally intervals is when the total number of balls out since power-on reaches a predetermined number of 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. In other words, the width of the tally intervals is basically 60,000 except for the first tally interval, where the first tally interval is 0-300, the second tally interval is 300-60,300, the third tally interval is 60,300-120,300, the fourth tally interval is 120,300-180,300, the fifth tally interval is 180,300-240,300, etc. The tally interval numbers indicating the first to fifth tally intervals are 0-4, respectively, and the tally interval number is maintained at 4 for the sixth tally interval and onwards. The current tally interval number is stored in the work area for displaying performance.

When it is time to switch the counting interval (step X85; Y), the game control device 100 sets the counting interval to be switched (step X86). When setting the counting interval to be switched, the total out counter that counts the total number of out balls (total number of outs), the normal out counter that counts the number of normal out balls (normal number of outs), which is the number of out balls (number of balls discharged) in each counting interval, and the normal prize ball number counter that counts the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls (number of balls won) in each counting interval, are cleared, and the final base value (or latest base value) of each counting interval is shifted (moved) to the base value storage area of the adjacent counting interval.

When it is not time to switch the counting period (step X85; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (step X87). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information copied to the performance display work area for each monitored input port (copied in step X713 in FIG. 64) is checked. For each monitored input port, there is an 8-bit area for storing the copied switch rising edge information. If the switch rising edge information for all monitored input ports is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input, and in all other cases it can be determined that there is input. Note that, unless masked during copying, the switch rising edge information has a bit set to 1 corresponding to a switch that has had a new input (detection) in the input process (step X103) and a bit set to 0 corresponding to a switch that has not had a new input.

When there is a switch input to the monitored input port (step X87; Y), the game control device 100 checks the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter to obtain the input information (step X88). The target switches here are the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the start port 1 switch 36a of the first start winning port 36, the start port 2 switch 37a of the second start winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a (left winning port switch, right winning port switch) of the general winning port 35, the out ball detection switch 74, etc., which can change the base value (or ball output rate) by detecting game balls.

Then, the game control device 100 judges whether the target switch is in its valid period (step X89). Note that if a special prize slot fraud or regular power fraud occurs and the special prize slot or second start prize slot 37 is invalid, that is, the special prize slot switches 38a, 39a and start slot 2 switch 37a are not valid. In addition, there are switches that are always valid, such as the first start prize slot 36 and the out ball detection switch 74.

If the target switch is in its valid period (step X89; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (step X90). If the target switch is not in its valid period (step X89; N) or if there is no input to the target switch (step X90; N), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step X98.

When there is an input to the target switch (step X90; Y), the game control device 100 clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (step X91) and determines whether or not it is in the normal base state (step X92). The normal base state (low base state) is a period during which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal game state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (step X92; Y), if the target switch is a switch that awards prize balls, it updates the normal prize ball count, which is the total number of prize balls in the counting period, by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch (step X93). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the normal out ball count (normal out number, normal discharged balls), which is the number of out balls in the counting period, by adding 1 (step X94). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the total out ball count (total outs, total discharged balls) by adding 1 (step X95).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only game balls that have entered the out opening 30b, but also game balls that have entered the winning openings (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37, large winning opening, or general winning opening 35) are guided to the out ball detection switch 74 via a passage or the like (not shown) and detected.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state, which is the normal game state (step X92; N), it updates only the total number of out balls without updating either the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls (step X95). Therefore, in a high base state (second game state, time-saving state, special game state, or special game state) that is not the normal base state, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls are updated, and the base value calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls (number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal out balls) is not updated and remains unchanged. It is also possible to eliminate the determination process regarding the normal base state in step X92 and configure the base value to be updateable (changeable) as the ball payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (step X96). Note that the performance display editing process is executed at a time interval (e.g., several μsec) that is much shorter than the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (predetermined time period, e.g., 4 msec) due to the loop processing in the main processing. For this reason, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed during the interrupt period, and the switch counter (e.g., 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (e.g., bit 0 to bit 7) for each input port to be monitored. In addition, the switch counter is updated to 0 after the final value (e.g., 7), and the switch input for the next input port to be monitored is checked. For example, the switch input for the third input port 124 is checked first, and then the switch input for the fourth input port 126 is checked.

On the other hand, when there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports (step X87; N), the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) to calculate a base value (step X97). Note that there may be cases where there is no switch input to the monitored input ports from the beginning. On the other hand, even if there is initially a switch input to some or all of the monitored input ports, after the switch input is checked for all monitored input ports, the input information for the target switches that have had an input is cleared (step X91), so that there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated by the number of normal prize balls divided by the number of normal out balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37), the large winning hole, or the general winning hole 35, in the first stage, the number of normal prize balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the winning hole switch 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a to which the prize ball is awarded, and the base value changes, and in the second stage, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value changes. In other words, when one game ball enters a winning hole, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out hole 30b that opens to the game board 30, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated or changed by the ball itself, so the base value is also maintained unchanged. Even if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls is not updated because no prize balls are awarded.

Regardless of whether the base value has changed, the processing in steps X224 to X230 of the output process will output the base value as a performance display on the performance display device 152. However, if the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, or if a strong error 2 occurs and game play is stopped, the performance display device 152 will output off data and turn off.

As a special example, the calculation of the base value may be performed only during the real-time value display period in which the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. In this special example, the normal number of winning balls and the normal number of out balls are updated until the real-time value display period arrives, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step X96 or step X97, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (step X98), loads from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (step X99), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in FIG. 10, the processing of step X97 can be performed immediately after step X94, so that the base value calculation process is performed immediately after the number of normal winning balls or the number of normal out balls is updated, without waiting for the input check of all switches of the monitored input port.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in a clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (step X101), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a specified register (step X102). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, this is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, i.e., to read the state of each input port (step X103). Next, based on the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (step X104). If the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (step X104; Y), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (step X105).

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting or checking the probability setting (step X104; N), it executes output processing (step X106) to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (e.g., large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b) and drive control of LEDs (light emission control) based on the output data set in various processes. Note that if a launch stop signal is output in the processing of step X5 in the main processing, this output processing can be performed to output a launch permission signal, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process that outputs commands (such as payout commands) that have been set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the payout control device 200 (step X107). After that, it executes a win port switch/status monitoring process that monitors whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the win port switch 35a, and the large win port switches 38a and 39a, and monitors for errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open) (step X108).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X109). If the safety device is activated or if a severe error 2 occurs that requires the game to be stopped, it can be determined that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (step X109; N), the game control device 100 executes special game processing (step X110), accessory game processing (step X111), normal game processing (step X112), and segment LED editing processing (step X113). After that, it executes the processing from step X114 onwards. In addition to when no error has occurred, the game control device 100 also executes special game processing (step X110), accessory game processing (step X111), normal game processing (step X112), and segment LED editing processing (step X113) when a weak error and strong error 1 have occurred.

In the segment LED editing process, settings related to the operation of some of the multiple segment LEDs that make up the collective display device 50 (memory display section, round display section, etc.: LED lamps D3 to D7, D11 to D17) are executed. Settings related to the operation of other parts of the collective display device 50 (variation display section: LED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the pattern variation control process (steps A16, A18, C15). Settings related to the operation of another part of the collective display device 50 (probability status display section: LED lamp D9) are executed in the power outage recovery process (step X48) etc.

When play is stopped (step X109; Y), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing from step X114 onwards without executing the special game processing (step X110), the gimmick game processing (step X111), the regular game processing (step X112) or the segment LED editing processing (step X113). In this way, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs and play is stopped, the special game processing (step X110) and the regular game processing (step X112) are not executed, so the number of special reserved games (steps A136, A532) and the number of regular reserved games (steps C107, C318) do not change. On the other hand, when a weak error or strong error 1 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special game process (step X110) and the regular game process (step X112) are executed, so the number of special reserved games (steps A136, A532) and the number of regular reserved games (steps C107, C318) can be changed by updating by +1 (when a reservation is made) or -1 (when a reservation is consumed).

Depending on the type of error, such as a weak error, strong error 1, or strong error 2, it is also possible to configure the system to execute some of the special game processing (step X110), the accessory game processing (step X111), the normal game processing (step X112), and the segment LED editing processing (step X113), but not execute the others. For example, if a strong error 2 occurs, only the segment LED editing processing may be executed.

The game control device 100 also executes safety device-related processing, which can send safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device as a presentation command to the presentation control device 300 and set a safety device operation flag (step X114). It then executes magnet fraud monitoring processing, which checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there are any abnormalities (step X115). It also executes radio fraud monitoring processing (board radio fraud monitoring processing), which checks the detection signal from the board radio sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there are any abnormalities (step X116).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process to monitor fraud caused by vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (step X117). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process to monitor abnormal discharge from the large prize opening is executed (step X118). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge from the special variable prize winning device 39 is monitored based on the input from the large prize opening switch 38a, 39a, the specific area switch 72a (V prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 in the special variable prize winning device 38, 39, and an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set when an abnormal discharge occurs. Note that the game balls that pass through the large prize opening switch 38a, 39a of the special variable prize winning device 38, 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72a (V prize opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process that sets signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step X119). Then, as in step X109, it determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X120).

When the game is not stopped (step X120; N), the game control device 100 saves the flag register to the in-area stack area (step X121) and executes outside-area integration processing (step X122) that updates the safety device counter value (calculates the difference in the number of balls) and controls the display of the performance display device 152. After that, the flag register is restored (step X123) and the timer interrupt processing ends. When the safety device is not activated and strong error 2 has not occurred, the game is not stopped and the processing of steps X121 to X123 is executed, including the outside-area integration processing.

As described below, when transitioning to the outside-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the inside-area stack area related to game control to the outside-area stack area. At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of RAM 111c, the flag register is saved in advance in step X121.

On the other hand, when play is stopped (step X120; Y), the game control device 100 ends the timer interrupt process without executing the outside area integration process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs, the outside area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the display contents of the performance display, such as the base value, are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while play is stopped.

Unlike the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure the system so that the game does not stop, but instead executes special game processing (step X110), gimmick game processing (step X111), normal game processing (step X112), and segment LED editing processing (step X113). It is also possible to configure the system so that even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game does not stop, but executes outside-area integration processing, etc.

When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank designation are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the process of allowing interrupts and returning the register bank designation to register bank 0 may be performed after the external information editing process.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The game control device 100 first outputs off data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 3) that outputs the data of the segments of the collective display device (LED) 50, and resets the output port 135 (step X201). Next, it sets off output data for all solenoids (big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 72b, and normal power solenoid 37c) (step X202). Then, as in step X109, it determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X203). It can be determined that the game is stopped if the safety device is activated or if a strong error 2 that requires the game to be stopped has occurred.

When the game is not stopped (step X203; N), the game control device 100 synthesizes data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs data for the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 72b, and the normal power solenoid 37c (step X204). Then, it outputs data to the solenoid output port 134 (step X205). When the game is stopped (step X203; Y), it does nothing and proceeds to the processing of step X205, outputting off data (step X202) to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is stopped, the operation of all solenoids stops, and the large prize opening, the specific area 72, the normal variable prize opening device 37, etc. are closed and are in a closed state. In this way, when the game is stopped, the large prize opening is closed and round play (play during a large win or small win) cannot be performed.

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (it adds 1, but updates to 0 after 3) (step X206). Furthermore, it acquires digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the digit counter value (step X207). Then, it combines the acquired digit output data and external information data (step X208), and outputs the combined data to the digit output/external information output port 136 (step X209).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off data as the segment output data for the segment line (step X210). Then, it sets output data for prohibiting firing (step X211). Furthermore, as in step X203, it determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X212).

When the game is not stopped (step X212; N), the game control device 100 loads segment output data from the segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (step X213), sets output data for permission to launch (step X214), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (step X215). Note that this segment area may be included in the in-area work area (work area for game control).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the digit counter value is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected and segment output data is output to the eight segment lines of the digit to which this digit line is connected. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected in sequence, and a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50 is realized.

On the other hand, when play is stopped (step X212; Y), the game control device 100 outputs off data (step X210) to the output port 135 for segment output (step X215) without processing steps X213 and X214. As a result, in a game stop state where the safety device has been activated or strong error 2 has occurred, the collective display device 50 is turned off. As a result, the special chart change display game and the regular chart change display game cannot be executed in a game stop state. Then, a player who looks at the collective display device 50 can recognize that play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (fraudulent error) has occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (step X216), further synthesizes the synthesized external information data with the output data of launch permission or launch prohibition (step X217), and finally outputs the synthesized data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (step X218). Note that here, if the game is not stopped, the output data becomes launch permission (step X214), and if the game is stopped, the output data becomes launch prohibition (launch stop) (step X211). As a result, when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs in a game stop state, the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited, while when the game is not stopped, the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is permitted. Note that it is also possible to configure the ball launcher to be permitted to launch game balls even in a game stop state, without prohibiting launch (launch stop).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (step X219). After that, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (step X220).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (step X221). Furthermore, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (step X222). Then, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (step X223).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) that outputs the data of the segment of the performance display device (LED) 152, and resets the output port 141 (step X224). Next, the value of the digit counter 2, which is used to sequentially scan the digit lines of the performance display device 152, is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (it only adds 1, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (step X225). Furthermore, it acquires the digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter 2 (step X226). Then, it outputs the acquired digit output data to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (step X227).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped, as in step X203 etc. (step X228). If the game is not stopped (step X228; N), it loads segment output data from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (step X229). The performance display device segment area is included in a performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, it outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (step X230), and then ends the output process.

On the other hand, when play is stopped (step X228; Y), the game control device 100 ends the output process without executing the processes of steps X229 and X230. Therefore, when play is stopped due to the safety device being activated or when play is stopped due to the occurrence of strong error 2, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, so the off data of step X224 is output directly to the output port 141 for the performance display device 152. In this case, when the value of digit counter 2 goes through the range of 0 to 3, all LEDs of the performance display device 152 are forcibly turned off and become invisible, and the person in charge or staff of the game center who sees the performance display device 152 can recognize that play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (fraudulent error) has occurred.

It is also possible to configure the device to execute steps X229 and X230, etc., without stopping the game even if strong error 2 occurs.

[Winning port switch/status monitoring process]
Next, the details of the winning port switch/state monitoring process (step X108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning port switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the number of acquired game balls area included in the work area within the area to 0 (step X301). As a result, the number of acquired game balls area becomes an area that stores the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of prize balls (total) acquired within one interrupt (within a specified time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interrupt. Then, a prize opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper large prize opening switch 39a in the upper large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39) is prepared (step X302). Then, even though the upper large prize opening is not open, the game control device 100 executes an illegal and winning monitoring process that monitors whether there is any illegal winning at the upper large prize opening and detects normal winning (step X303).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower large winning port switch 38a in the lower large winning port (special variable winning device 38) (step X304). Then, even though the lower large winning port is not open, it monitors whether there is any illegal winning at the lower large winning port and executes an illegal & winning monitoring process to detect normal winning (step X305).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X306). Then, it executes a fraud & winning monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (step X307). Next, it prepares a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches that allow winning at any time and do not require fraud monitoring (step X308). Examples of winning port switches that allow winning at any time are the start port 1 switch 36a and the general winning port 35.

The game control device 100 then executes a win counter update process to update the number of wins (step X309). Then, it updates a status scan counter to specify, in order, which of the multiple switches and signals whose states should be monitored should be the target of this monitoring (step X310). The status scan counter is updated within the range of 0 to 3.

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (step X311). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (step X312).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (switch abnormality error) based on the abnormality detection signal output due to an occurrence such as a switch connector coming loose is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball out error) based on the chute ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status (payout abnormality error) based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. In this way, weak errors are monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (step X313). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (step X314).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch (glass frame open error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the main frame open detection switch (main frame open error, front frame open error) is set. Also, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (frame radio wave illegal) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X315). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X315; N), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing of step X317.

In addition, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X315; Y), the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process that sets a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is able to start payout control (step X316), and proceeds to the process of step X317.

The processing of step X316 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated at each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if the timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, the processing of step X316 is executed every 16 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V-passing timing monitoring process to monitor whether the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72a at an inappropriate timing (step X317). In the V-passing timing monitoring process, if a detection signal of the specific area switch 72a is generated at an inappropriate timing, it is determined to be a V-passing error.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether any game balls remain in the specific area switch 72a (step X318), and ends the winning port switch/status monitoring process.

The V-pass timing monitoring process and remaining ball monitoring process in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process are necessary for so-called Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machines (Type 1+2 machines) such as this embodiment, but may not be necessary for normal Type 1 pachinko machines.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Processing]
14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fraud and winning monitoring process. The fraud and winning monitoring process is executed in steps X303, X305, and X307 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud and winning monitoring process is performed on the lower large winning port switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning port switch (start port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. The second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) and the large winning port (special variable winning devices 38, 39) are prone to fraud whereby the opening and closing member is forcibly opened to insert game balls and pay out prize balls, so in addition to detecting winning, they are monitored for fraud.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraudulent monitoring period flag of the prize winning port switch that is the object of error monitoring (step X321), and determines whether or not it is in the fraudulent monitoring period (step X322). For example, the fraudulent monitoring period is a period during which the prize winning port switch that is the object of error monitoring does not normally detect game balls, and is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened when the prize winning port switch is the lower large prize winning port switch 38a.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target winning port switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target winning port switch (step X323; N), it loads the target's alarm timer update information (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning port switch (step X323; Y), it updates the target's number of fraudulent wins by +1 (step X324), and determines whether the number of fraudulent wins after the increment is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrences (e.g., 5) that are being monitored (step X325).

The reason for the number of judgments being set to five is to prevent cases such as when a game ball gets caught in the door member of the large prize opening when the opening is switched from an open state to a closed state, and the game ball wins after the count switch's valid period has expired, or when noise is present in the signal, from being judged as cheating, and to prevent an error being easily judged even when there is no cheating.

Then, if the number is not equal to or greater than the judgment number (step X325; N), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table for the target winning port switch (step X330). If the number is equal to or greater than the judgment number (step X325; Y), the game control device 100 keeps the number of illegal wins at the number of illegal occurrences judgment (step X326) and saves an initial value (e.g., 60,000 ms) in the target illegal win notification timer area (step X327).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud command as a presentation command (step X328), and further prepares a fraud win occurrence flag as a fraud flag (step X329). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table for the target winning port switch (step X330) and executes a winning number counter update process that sets the winning balls (step X331). The details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target alarm timer update information (step X332) and determines whether or not the alarm timer update is permitted (step X333). If the alarm timer update is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the alarm timer update is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target alarm timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the alarm timer is set to 0.

The update of the alarm timer is permitted if the prize winning port switch being monitored for errors is the prize winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable prize winning device 37. Also, if there are two prize winning port switches in one special variable prize winning device (large prize winning port), the update of the alarm timer is permitted if one of the prize winning port switches is being monitored for errors, but is not permitted if the other prize winning port switch is being monitored for errors. This prevents the alarm timer from being updated twice as frequently for an illegal alarm for one special variable prize winning device, causing the timer to time out in half the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the alarm timer is 0 or not (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), i.e., if the timer has not yet timed out, ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. On the other hand, if the value of the alarm timer is 0 (step X335; Y), i.e., if the timer has timed out or has already timed out, it prepares the target fraud release command as a presentation command (step X336), and prepares a fraud win release flag as a fraud flag (step X337). It then determines whether this is the moment when the alarm timer value becomes 0 (step X338).

When the value of the notification timer reaches 0 (step X338; Y), i.e., when the value of the notification timer reaches 0 during this fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 clears the number of fraudulent winnings (step X339).

In addition, after the processing of step X339 is completed, or if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous or previous fraud and winning monitoring processing, the game control device 100 compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag and the value in the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the game control device 100 ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared fraud flag and the value in the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340; N), the game control device 100 saves the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (step X341) and executes the performance command setting process (step X342). Thereafter, the fraud and winning monitoring process ends.

By the above process, when fraud occurs, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the performance control device 300, and when fraud is cleared, a fraud clear command is sent to the performance control device 300, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

[Winning Number Counter Update Process]
15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update process. The winning number counter update process is executed in step X309 of the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG. 13 or in step X331 of the fraud and winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X351). It can determine that the game is stopped if the safety device is activated or if a severe error 2 occurs that requires the game to be stopped.

When the game is not stopped (A2201; N), the game control device 100 obtains the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2202) and determines whether there is an input to the target winning port switch (A2203). The winning table of the winning port monitoring table defines the number of winning balls, the address of winning number counter area 1, the address of winning number counter area 2, etc. for each winning port switch to be monitored. If there is no input (A2203; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X365) and determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X366).

On the other hand, if there is an input to the target winning port switch (step X353; Y), the game control device 100 loads the number of won game balls from the won game ball number area (step X354), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning port switch to the number of won game balls (step X355), and saves the added value in the won game ball number area (step X356). As a result, the number of won game balls stored in the won game ball number area is updated for each winning port switch, and the number of won game balls finally becomes the number of prize balls won within one interrupt (total).

The area for the number of winning balls is in the work area within the area, and is written by the winning number counter update process program (part of the program within the area), and is only read by the difference ball confirmation process program (part of the program outside the area) described below. Note that even if input is made to all winning slot switches at the same time, the total number of winning balls does not reach 255 (1 byte), so no upper limit check is made on the number of winning balls.

The game control device 100 then loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (step X357) and updates the loaded value by +1 (step X358). It then determines whether the updated value will cause an overflow (step X359). The winning number counter area 1 is 2 bytes (0 to 65535) in size.

If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the number of winnings counter area 1 (step X360). After the processing of step X360 is completed, or if an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target number of winnings counter area 2 (step X361).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (step X362) and determines whether the updated value will cause an overflow (step X363). If an overflow does not occur (step X363; N), the updated value is saved in the number of winnings counter area 2 (step X364). The number of winnings counter area 2 is 1 byte (0 to 255) in size.

After completing the process of step X364, or if an overflow occurs (step X363; Y), the game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X365). Then, it determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X366).

If the game control device 100 has not finished monitoring all the switches (step X366; N), it returns to the process of step X353, which determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch. If the game control device 100 has finished monitoring all the switches (step X366; Y), it ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, the processes of steps X353 to X366 are repeated until the monitoring of all the switches is finished, and the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of winning balls acquired (total) within one interruption, is obtained, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winnings at each winning port (each winning area) within one interruption, and winning information is stored.

When game play is stopped (step X351; Y), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, in the game stopped state, the detection of game balls by the winning port switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated, so winning information is not stored and no prize balls are obtained (paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on winning information stored before the game stopped state (i.e., when the detection of game balls by the winning port switch was valid) continues even in the game stopped state.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to send payout commands (prize ball commands) to the payout control device 200 to instruct the payout of prize balls, and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls for which a payout command has not yet been sent. In other words, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter that can store information related to prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is an area used to transmit a main prize ball signal that is output to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning balls entering the winning slot reaches a predetermined number (here, 10 balls), and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls that have not undergone the main prize ball signal generation process. In other words, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information related to the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning port (for example, 3 winning balls, 2 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls), and the count of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of a winning port. In other words, the winning information can be stored in units of one winning at a winning port. Note that the winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 (1 byte), so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main winning ball signal can be sent regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may be withheld depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, and therefore more unsent data may be accumulated.

[Gaming machine status check process]
16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps X312, X314, etc. in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first obtains a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter (step X371). The status scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game status. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as explained in the prize slot switch/status monitoring process.

The game control device 100 then determines whether the signal being checked is on or not (step X372). If the signal being checked is not on (step X372; N), i.e., if the signal being checked is off, it prepares a status off flag as a status flag (step X373) and obtains and prepares a status off command for the target (step X374). It then obtains a status off monitoring timer comparison value for the target (step X375). The status off flag indicates a normal state for error-related signals, and indicates a untouched state for touch switch signals.

On the other hand, if the signal to be checked is on (step X372; Y), the game control device 100 prepares a status on flag as a status flag (step X376), and acquires and prepares the target status on command (step X377). Furthermore, it acquires the target status on monitoring timer comparison value (step X378). The status on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error-related signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step X375 or step X378 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the acquired signal state (step X379). If they match (step X379; Y), it proceeds to processing of step X382. If they do not match (step X379; N), it saves the acquired signal state in the target signal control area (step X380) and clears the target state monitoring timer (step X381).

The game control device 100 then updates the target status monitoring timer by +1 (step X382). Furthermore, it determines whether the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383). If the updated status monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383; N), the game machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383; Y), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and keeps it at the timer comparison value -1 (step X384). Furthermore, it determines whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step X385). If they match (step X385; Y), the game machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prepared status flag does not match the value of the target status flag area (step X385; N), the game control device 100 saves the prepared status flag in the target status flag area (step X386). Finally, it executes a performance command setting process to set a performance command (step X387), and ends the game machine status check process.

The presentation command here is either a status off command or a status on command. If the status on command is an error command, it causes the presentation control device 300 to start reporting an error. Status on commands that cause the presentation control device 300 to start reporting an error include commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to the payout of game balls, such as a shot ball out error, an overflow error, or an abnormal payout error, as well as commands that correspond to frame opening errors (included in strong error 1), such as a glass frame opening error or a main frame opening error, and commands that correspond to frame radio wave irregularity errors (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change/confirmation process. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (step X401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area included in the work area within the area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (step X401; Y), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (step X402) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (step X404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (step X401; N), the game control device 100 sets the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (step X403) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (step X404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data on the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Note that in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as the amusement facility manager or staff, if the probability setting values are different but the probability of a big win (and small win) is the same, the display probability setting value may be made the same in correspondence with the probability of a big win (and small win). In other words, the same display probability setting value may mean the same probability of a big win (and small win).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (step X405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step X37. Next, security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (such as the amusement facility internal management device (hall computer)) of an abnormality (step X406). Note that here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as a jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Then, the game control device 100 judges whether the probability setting change in progress flag is set (step X407). If the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (step X407; N), i.e., if the probability setting is being confirmed, the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process without doing anything.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (step X407; Y), i.e., when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 determines whether or not this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (step X408). If this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (step X408; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value is unintentionally updated if the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

If this is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X408; N), the game control device 100 determines whether there is input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X409). If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch (step X409; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (step X409; Y), the game control device 100 updates the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) by +1 within the possible range, and updates the probability setting value in the probability setting value area by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (step X410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. Note that, when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability setting value) may be stored in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) that stores the working setting value. Note that, if the working setting value is updated by +1 when it is 5 (probability setting value 6), it can return to the working setting value 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched over and over again. Additionally, the possible range of the working setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of a multi-stage setting where there are multiple probability setting values, but only 0 in the case of a single-stage setting. In the case of a multi-stage setting, the working setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of a single-stage setting, they remain the same even when updated (they are updated to the same value).

In addition, a command (setting value information command) to inform the performance control device 300 of the setting value may be sent each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external test firing device each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. It is preferable to stop these transmissions and outputs if there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the game control device 100. In addition, when the game state is switched to a probability variable state, time-saving state, or jackpot state, or when the special chart variable display game is started, a command (setting value information command) to inform the performance control device 300 of the setting value may be sent, or a test signal may be output to an external test firing device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but the probability setting value (working setting value) being changed may be stored in the working setting value area of the RAM 111c, and when the setting key switch 153 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (step X39; Y), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area is stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (step X40; Y), it is possible to prevent the probability setting value used for game control, presentation control, etc. (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) from being changed to an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special game processing (step X110) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game processing. In the special game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the whole processing related to the special game variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special game is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process that monitors the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A1). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 that constitutes the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the entry (entry) of a game ball into the specific area 72 (V entry port) (step A2). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper large prize opening switch monitoring process (step A3). In the upper large prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch (upper large prize opening switch 39a) provided in the special variable prize opening device 39 is monitored.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (step A4). By updating the special game processing timer by -1, the timer will be timed for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. The minimum value of the special game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special game processing timer is 0 (step A5). If the special game processing timer is not 0 (step A5; N), the process proceeds to step A15.

When the special game processing timer is 0 (step A5; Y), i.e., when the timer is up or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to a process corresponding to the special game processing number (step A6). Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game processing number using the special game sequence branch table (step A7). Next, a subroutine call is made using the special game processing number to execute game branch processing according to the special game processing number (step A8).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A8, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the special chart change display game and executes the special chart normal processing (step A9), which sets the start of the special chart change display game, sets the performance, and sets information required for processing during the special chart change. Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes a special pattern change process that sets the stop display time of the special pattern and sets information necessary for performing processing while the special pattern is displayed (step A10). For example, in the special pattern change process, necessary information is set such as a pattern stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern and a stop display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern, and the process number "2" for the special pattern display process is set and saved in the special pattern game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes a special chart display process that sets information necessary for transitioning to a big win state or a small win state (step A11). For example, in the special chart display process, if the result of the special chart change display game is a big win, condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the processing number "0" related to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart change display game is a small win, necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before the small win is released is set, and the processing number "3" related to the processing before the small win is released is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart change display game is a miss, the processing number "0" related to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes small win pre-opening processing (step A12). For example, in the small win pre-opening processing, the opening time of the large prize opening due to a small win (small win opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, on data is saved in the upper large prize opening solenoid output data area, the small win opening command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "4" related to the small win opening processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes the small win open processing (step A13). For example, in the small win open processing, the small win remaining ball processing time (e.g., 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "5" for the small win remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes the small win remaining ball processing (step A14). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" related to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special symbol game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special symbol 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 display 51 (step A15), and then executes a pattern fluctuation control process related to the special symbol 1 display 51 (step A16). Then, after preparing a special symbol 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A17), it executes a pattern fluctuation control process related to the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A18). Next, it executes a lever solenoid control process (step A19) that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 72b so that the lever solenoid 72b is opened during a small win, and ends the special symbol game processing.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process will be described. FIG 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (step A101), executes a hard random number acquisition process (step A102), and determines whether or not there has been a winning in the start winning hole 36 (step A103). If there has been no winning in the start winning hole 36 (step A103; N), it executes the process from step A109 onwards. On the other hand, if there has been a winning in the start winning hole 36 (step A103; Y), it determines whether or not the game is in a right-hitting state (step A104).

When the game control device 100 determines that the game state is not for right-hitting (step A104; N), it executes the processing from step A107 onwards. On the other hand, when the game state is for right-hitting (step A104; Y), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (step A105) and executes a presentation command setting process (step A106). In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the presentation command is transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

In other words, if the game is in the normal power support state (time-saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the performance command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, it is easier to win the start winning hole 36 by hitting from the left, and the normal variable winning device 37 can only be won by hitting from the right. Also, the game ball will not pass through the normal start gate 34 unless it is hit from the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), hitting from the right is more advantageous than hitting from the left, but if there is a win in the start winning hole 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if a left hit is made during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit to the right on the display device 41, etc., by displaying a right-hit instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the start winning port 36 (start winning port 1) (step A107), and then executes the special chart start winning port switch common processing (step A108). Then, it prepares a winning monitoring table for the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A109), executes a hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and determines whether or not there has been a winning at the second start winning port (step A111). If there has been no winning at the second start winning port (step A111; N), it ends the start port switch monitoring processing.

On the other hand, when there is a winning entry into the second start winning slot (step A111; Y), the game control device 100 judges whether the normal electric device (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in operation and in an open state allowing the winning of a game ball (step A112). If the normal electric device is in operation (step A112; Y), the process proceeds to step A114.

On the other hand, if the normal electric device is not in operation (step A112; N), the game control device 100 determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (step A113). It determines that normal power fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence judgment number (e.g., 5). The normal variable winning device 37 does not allow game balls to win when it is closed, and game balls can only win when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such wins is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence judgment number (upper limit value).

If normal power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), then executes special chart start port switch common processing (step A115), and ends the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in step A113 that normal power fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring processing is also ended. In other words, no further second start memories are generated.

[Special diagram start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special drawing start port switch common processing (step A108, step A115) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be described. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing start port switch common processing. The special drawing start port switch common processing is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input of the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The game control device 100 first loads the start port signal output count, which is the number of times that information on the number of winnings on the start port switch to be monitored, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the game machine 10 (step A131), updates the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determines whether the output count will overflow (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output count area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the output count will overflow.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the number of reserved special figures (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch being monitored, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step A135). If the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (number of reserved special figures 1 or number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 (step A136), and the target start port winning flag is saved (step A137).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch and the number of reserved special symbols to be monitored (step A138), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A139). Next, it extracts the jackpot pattern random number of the special symbol variation display game that starts upon detection of the start port switch to be monitored, and saves it in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A140). Next, it extracts the small jackpot pattern random number of the special symbol variation display game that starts upon detection of the start port switch to be monitored, and saves it in the small jackpot pattern random number storage area (step A141). It also extracts the support jackpot pattern random number for determining the time-saving pattern, and saves the support jackpot pattern random number in the support jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A142).

In this embodiment, as described above, since a big win occurs reliably when a V is entered after a small win, there is no need to use a small win pattern random number, and step A141 is optional and does not need to be executed. Also, since there is no small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game, if the start port switch to be monitored is start port 1 switch 36a, there is no need to extract a small win pattern random number.

The small win pattern random number, support win pattern random number, and big win pattern random number are used in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (step A323) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (step A333) described below to determine the stop pattern number at the time of a small win, the stop pattern number at the time of a support hit, or the stop pattern number at the time of a big win, and the small win stop pattern pattern, support hit stop pattern, or big win stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers.

In this embodiment, to avoid confusion, the small win pattern random number, the support win pattern random number, and the big win pattern random number are each set independently, but in order to reduce the random number storage area of the RWM, one random number (common random number) may be shared to allocate the small win pattern (stop pattern number at the time of small win, small win stop pattern), the support win pattern (stop pattern number at the time of support win, support hit stop pattern), and the big win pattern (stop pattern number at the time of big win, big win stop pattern). In other words, when determining the small win pattern, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each small win pattern, when determining the support win pattern, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each support win pattern, and when determining the big win pattern, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each big win pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A143), and executes a special reserved information judgment process (pre-judgment process, pre-reading process) that can judge the result of the variable display game (game result) in advance (step A144). In the special reserved information judgment process, a pre-reading stop pattern command corresponding to the stop pattern information (jackpot stop pattern, small win stop pattern, time-saving stop pattern, miss stop pattern) based on the saved jackpot random number and winning pattern random number (jackpot pattern random number, small win pattern random number, support winning pattern random number), etc., and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation before the reach) and the second half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after the reach) based on the saved fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are set as performance commands. Then, a decorative special chart reservation number command corresponding to the start port switch and special chart reservation number to be monitored is prepared as a presentation command (step A145), a presentation command setting process (step A146) is executed, and the special chart start port switch common process is terminated. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a pre-determination means that can determine the result of the variable display game based on the start memory before the variable display game is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and storing the predetermined number as a start memory that serves as the right to execute the variable display game, with an upper limit of the predetermined number. The start memory means (game control device 100) also stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first start winning port (start winning port 36) as a first start memory with an upper limit of the predetermined number, and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of game balls into the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) as a second start memory with an upper limit of the predetermined number.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process will be described in detail. FIG 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small win is occurring (step A201). If the special game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that a small win is occurring. If a small win is occurring (step A201; Y), it is determined whether or not a condition device is operating (step A202). If condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set, it can be determined that the condition device is operating.

When the condition device is not in operation (step A202; N), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72a (step A203). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72a (step A203; Y), that is, when there is a win (V win) in the specific area 72, the game control device saves the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation in the condition device operation information area (step A204), and ends the specific area switch monitoring process.

If there is no small win (step A201; N), if the condition device is operating (step A202; Y), or if there is no input to the specific area switch 72a (step A203; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends without doing anything.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, the details of the special chart normal processing (step A9) in the special chart game processing will be described. FIG 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the normal reel processing of the reel game processing described below is in progress and whether the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is 0 (step A301). If the normal reel processing is not in progress or the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is not 0 (step A301; N), the special chart variation display game is not started and the process proceeds to step A316.

When the game device is in normal processing and the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0 (step A301; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (step A302). When the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step A302; Y), it determines whether the number of reserved special figures 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (step A307). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step A307; Y), it determines whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A312), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (step A312; N), it sets the customer waiting demo in progress flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A313).

The game control device 100 then prepares a customer waiting demo command as a presentation command (step A314), performs presentation command setting processing (step A315), and proceeds to processing in step A316. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A312 (step A312; Y), the processing number is set to "0" for the special chart normal processing (step A316), the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area (step A317), and the variable chart discrimination flag area is cleared (step A318). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A319), and the special chart normal processing ends.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is not 0 (step A302; N), the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 change start process (step A303), prepares a decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the reserved number of special charts 2 as a presentation command (step A304), and executes a presentation command setting process (step A305). Then, it executes a special chart change processing transition setting process for special chart 2 (step A306), and ends the normal special chart processing.

In the special chart 2 special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the fluctuation flag is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is not 0 (step A307; N), the game control device 100 executes special chart 1 change start processing (step A308), prepares a decorative special chart reserved number command (decorative special chart 1 reserved number command) corresponding to the reserved number of special charts 1 as a performance command (step A309), and executes performance command setting processing (step A310). Then, it executes special chart 1 special chart change processing transition setting processing (step A311), and ends normal special chart processing.

In the special chart 1 special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the fluctuation flag is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (step A303) is executed. In other words, the special figure 2 change display game is executed in priority to the special figure 1 change display game (special figure 2 reservation priority consumption). In other words, when the second start memory is present in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the game control device 100 serves as a priority control means for executing the change display game based on the second start memory in priority over the change display game based on the first start memory. Note that, in the case of special figure 1 reservation priority consumption, in which the special figure 1 change display game is executed in priority to the special figure 2 change display game, the judgment in step A302 may be made as to whether the number of reserved special figures 1 is ≠ 0.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (step A308) in the special chart normal process will be described. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special chart 1 change flag, which indicates the type of special chart change display game to be executed (special chart 1 in this case), in the change pattern discrimination area (step A321). Next, it executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process, which performs processing such as setting miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special chart 1 change display game is a jackpot or not (step A322). The jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described in detail later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 stop pattern setting process for setting the special chart 1 stop pattern (pattern information) for the special chart 1 variable display game (step A323). In the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of a miss, a support hit, or a jackpot, and the miss stop pattern, the support hit stop pattern, or the jackpot stop pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number are saved. The stop pattern number at the time of a support hit or a jackpot is determined corresponding to the support hit pattern random number and the jackpot pattern random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (step A324).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to setting the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (step A325).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game (step A326). Next, the game control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation in the special chart 1 variation display game (step A327), and ends the special chart 1 variation start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a performance command, and a performance command setting process is performed. Also, in the variation start information setting process, the special chart reserved number related to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2) of the special chart variation display game that is about to start is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start process (step A303) in the special chart normal process will be described. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start process. The special chart 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the special chart 1 variation start process shown in Figure 23, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the special chart 2 change flag, which indicates the type of special chart change display game to be executed (special chart 2 in this case), in the change pattern discrimination area (step A331). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process, which performs processing such as setting miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 to determine whether the special chart 2 change display game is a jackpot or not (step A332).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 stop pattern setting process related to setting the special chart 2 stop pattern (pattern information) related to the special chart 2 change display game (step A333). Furthermore, a special chart information setting process is executed to set the special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the change pattern (step A334). Next, a special chart 2 change pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to the setting of the change pattern of the special chart 2 change display game, is prepared (step A335).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game (step A336). Finally, it executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation of the special chart 2 variation display game (step A337), and ends the special chart 2 variation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special chart 1 variation start process will be described. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the jackpot flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM's special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A342), and the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A343). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is the first to be consumed (here, the first of special chart 1). After that, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A344).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A344) is a jackpot (step A345; Y), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A341 (step A346), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A345) is not a jackpot (step A345; N), optionally, a support hit determination process is executed (step A347) to determine whether the special chart variable display game is a support hit based on the acquired jackpot random number value, and the result of the determination is determined to be a support hit or not (step A348). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special chart variable display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special chart variable display game, and in response to this time-saving result, the performance control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special chart variable display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (step A348; Y), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A341 (step A349), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the special chart change display game is not a support hit (step A348; N), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is either a "big hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," and there is no "small hit." Note that steps A347 to A349 are provided as options, and they may be omitted to not provide a "support hit (time-saving hit)" as the result of the special chart 1 variable display game. It is also possible to configure the result of the special chart 1 variable display game to include a "small hit."

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since jackpots and support hits do not overlap, the support hit information may also be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in Figure 25, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the big win flag 2 area, the small win flag 2 area, and the support win flag 2 area (step A351). Next, the big win random number is loaded from the RWM's special chart 2 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A352), and the special chart 2 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A353). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is the first to be consumed (here, the first of the special charts 2). After that, a small win determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a small win depending on whether or not the prepared big win random number value matches the small win determination value (step A354).

If the result of the small hit determination process (step A354) is a small hit (step A355; Y), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A351 (step A356), and ends the big hit flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the special chart change display game is not a small win (step A355; N), the game control device 100 executes a support hit judgment process to judge whether the special chart change display game is a support hit or not based on the acquired jackpot random number value (step A357), and judges whether the judgment result is a support hit or not (step A358). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to judge the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit judgment and the jackpot judgment). Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special chart change display game is a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special chart change display game, and in response to this specific result, the performance control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special chart change display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (step A358; Y), the game control device 100 overwrites the support hit information in the support hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A351, saves it (step A359), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A357) is not a jackpot (step A358; N), an optional jackpot determination process may be executed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A360). If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A360) is a jackpot (step A361; Y), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A351 (step A362), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A360) is not a jackpot (step A361; N), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process while leaving the miss information saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game will be either a "small hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," but it is also possible to optionally configure the special chart 2 variable display game to have a "big hit."

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area, but since jackpots, support hits, and small hits do not overlap, small hit information and support hit information may also be saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (steps A344, A360) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A371), sets a lower limit judgment value for the jackpot judgment value (step A372), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A373). A jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot is judged to be a jackpot when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. The upper limit judgment value may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the high probability state) and the high probability state (high probability state).

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A373; Y), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to miss (other than jackpot) (step A375) and ends the jackpot judgment process.

The game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A374). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A374; Y), a miss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (step A375). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A374; N), a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A376). Once the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (step A354) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381), and judges whether the value of the target (special chart 2) big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A382). A small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a small hit is judged to be a small hit when the big hit random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, and equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. The small hit upper limit judgment value may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the special probability state) and the high probability state (special probability state).

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being both a small win and a big win, the range of small win determination values (between the small win lower limit determination value and the small win upper limit determination value) does not overlap with the range of big win determination values mentioned above (between the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value). Note that in this embodiment, a unique small win random number is not set, and the big win random number is also used to determine a small win, but a configuration in which a unique small win random number is set is also possible.

If the value of the jackpot random number for the target (special chart 2) is less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), the game control device 100 sets a miss as the judgment result (step A384) and ends the small jackpot judgment process.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 2) is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A383). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a miss is set as the judgment result (step A384). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A383; N), a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A385). After the judgment result is set, the small hit judgment process is terminated. In this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability may be other values.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination process (steps A347, A357) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described. Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. Note that the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a support hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A391). Next, it sets a lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value (step A392), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A393). Note that a support hit is when the jackpot random number matches the support hit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and it is judged to be a support hit when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the support hit judgment value, and is equal to or less than the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the support hit judgment value. Note that the support hit upper limit judgment value may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the high probability state) and the high probability state (high probability state).

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart change display game being a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (between the support hit lower limit judgment value and the support hit upper limit judgment value) does not overlap with the range of the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value described above. Note that in this embodiment, a unique support hit random number is not set, and the big hit random number is also used to judge the support hit, but a configuration in which a unique support hit random number is set is also possible.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value for a support hit (step A393; Y), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to miss (other than a support hit) (step A395), and ends the support hit judgment process.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A393; N), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A394). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A394; Y), it sets a miss (other than support hit) as the judgment result (step A395). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A394; N), it sets a support hit as the judgment result (step A396). Once the judgment result is set, the support hit judgment process ends.

In the support hit determination process, a support hit determination (time-saving determination) is performed by lottery using a jackpot random number value. In the support hit determination (time-saving determination) as a lottery, if the jackpot random number value matches the support hit determination value (time-saving determination value), a support hit result (time-saving result, specific result) is obtained as the determination result and the time saving is set. The support hit determination value is different from the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value.

In order to add some variety, the winning probability of the support hit (range of the support hit judgment value ÷ range of the jackpot random number) may be different for each probability setting value, or for simplicity, the winning probability of the support hit may be the same for each probability setting value. The winning probability of the support hit may be set so that setting 1 (or the low setting side) is more likely to win the support hit and setting 6 (or the high setting side) is less likely to win the support hit, thereby mitigating the disadvantage of the low setting, or it may be set in the opposite direction to match the expectations of players who expect that it is easier to win the support hit on the high setting side. In addition, the winning probability of the support hit may be changed monotonically from setting 1 to setting 6, or it may not be monotonous, such as changing every two settings. The winning probability of the support hit may be made different between the even setting and the odd setting to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability setting value.

The probability of winning a support hit may be different during low probability (outside of the special probability state) and high probability (during the special probability state) of a jackpot to add contrast, or may be the same for simplicity. The probability of winning a support hit may be set so that it is easier to win during low probability (outside of the special probability state) and harder to win during high probability (during the special probability state) to alleviate the disadvantage during low probability, or it may be set the other way around to match the expectations of players who expect it to be easier to win a support hit during high probability. For example, the probability of winning a support hit may be set so that it is only possible to win a support hit during low probability (the probability of winning a support hit is zero during high probability), to alleviate the disadvantage during low probability.

The winning probability of a support hit may be different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to add contrast, or may be the same for simplicity. For example, in order to increase the number of support hits in the normal power support state (time-saving state or special probability state), the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 2 variable display game may be made higher than that in the special chart 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to increase the interest of the game in the normal game state, the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 1 variable display game may be made higher than that in the special chart 2 variable display game. In short, the winning probability of a support hit in one of the special chart 1 variable display games or the special chart 2 variable display game may be set to zero, so that a support hit occurs only in the other special chart variable display game.

If the result of the special chart change display game is a support hit result (time-saving result), the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern pattern) in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (step A323) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (step A333), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special chart change display game. In other words, in this case, the time-saving state is suddenly entered without going through a jackpot (sudden time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is sent to the performance control device 300, and the time-saving pattern (decorative time-saving pattern) is also displayed as a decorative stop pattern by the performance control device 300 on the display device 41.

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 may be, for example, "1, 1, 3" where only the left and center symbols are aligned. There are no restrictions on the time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but it is preferable for players to remember patterns that have a pattern, such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right symbols are aligned. Multiple time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of special symbol variation display games during which the time-saving state continues (number of time-saving times) may be determined for each time-saving symbol.

The lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 75 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) when the time-saving result (time-saving pattern) is reached, unlike when the result is a big win or small win. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red when the result is a big win or small win, and may emit light in a neutral or cool color (i.e., a color other than warm colors) such as green or blue when the result is a time-saving result (time-saving pattern). Also, the lamps are turned off when the result is a miss. Therefore, when the time-saving pattern is displayed as the stop pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that a big win has occurred, and it is easy for the player to understand that he or she has won the time-saving feature.

In addition, when the number of times of the special chart variation display game (excluding the number of times in the probability variation state) executed after the end of the big win state reaches a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), the time-saving state (play time) will be entered even if the support hit is not won. At this time, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, the lamp display units 1 and 2 will be in an off state, and if it is a small hit or a big hit, they will emit warm colors. In addition, at this time, if it is not a small hit or a big hit, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light as the fourth pattern in a cool color so that the player can easily recognize that the time-saving state will be entered. The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, a miss pattern (which may be a time-saving pattern) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) is displayed as a stop pattern on the special chart display unit or display device 41, and the time-saving state will be entered from the next special chart variation display game. In this case, the time-saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 may be, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left and center patterns are aligned (it may also be "1, 1, 3" as in the case of time-saving due to a support hit result).

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, i.e., whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A401). If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A401; Y), a jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special chart 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A402). Next, a special chart 1 jackpot pattern table is set (step A403), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area of the RWM (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

Then, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 1 jackpot stop pattern information table (step A405), obtains the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number, and saves it in the stop pattern pattern area (step A406). The stop pattern is used to set the stop pattern on the special chart display (here, the special chart 1 display 51) and the stop pattern on the display device 41. Then, it obtains round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number and saves it in the special chart 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (step A407), and obtains fanfare information corresponding to the stop pattern number and saves it in the fanfare information area (step A408). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time-saving judgment data corresponding to the stopping symbol number and saves it in the time-saving judgment data area (step A409). The time-saving judgment data includes information on whether or not there is a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving or no time-saving), and is used in the special symbol 1 jackpot end processing and special symbol 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, the game control device 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (or stopping symbol number, symbol A described below) (step A410). After that, the process proceeds to step A420.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401; N), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A411). If the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A411; Y), a random number is loaded from the special chart 1 support per pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A412) and the special chart 1 support per pattern table is set (step A413). Then, by referring to the special chart 1 support per pattern table, the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area (step A414). Next, the stop pattern pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the stop pattern pattern area (step A415). After that, the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A416), and the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop pattern pattern is saved (step A417). Then, proceed to step A420.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401; N) and the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A411; N), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special image 1 stop pattern number area (step A418) and saves the loss stop pattern in the stop pattern area (step A419). After that, it moves to the processing of step A420. Note that if the processing related to the support hit (steps A347 to A349) is not executed in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401; N), it moves to step A418 without executing steps A411 to A417.

After steps A410, A417, and A419, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special symbol 1 command in the decorative special symbol 1 command area as a performance command (step A420). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the performance command setting process (step A421). As a result, the decorative special chart 1 command is sent to the performance control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (step A422), and clears the special pattern 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A423). After that, the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process is terminated. Note that the stop display of the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or the stop pattern number is executed on the special pattern 1 display 51 by the aforementioned pattern change control process.

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the small win flag 2 is a small win, i.e., whether small win information is saved in the small win flag 2 area (step A431). If the small win flag 2 is a small win (step A431; Y), a jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special chart 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A432). Next, a special chart 2 jackpot pattern table is set (step A433), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area of the RWM (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

In this embodiment, the game ball enters the V when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so the big win pattern random number is loaded even if the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win (small win flag 2 is small win). However, it is also possible to load the small win pattern random number (step A141) and obtain the stop pattern number corresponding to the small win pattern random number. In this configuration, the big win pattern random number may be loaded at the time of V winning (when step A203 in FIG. 21 becomes Y), the stop pattern number may be obtained, and the processing from steps A437 to A440 may be executed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 2 big win stop pattern information table (step A435), obtains the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number, and saves it in the stop pattern pattern area (step A436). The stop pattern pattern is for setting the stop pattern on the special chart display (here, the special chart 2 display 52) and the stop pattern on the display device 41. In the case of a small win, the special chart 2 small win stop pattern information table may be used instead of the special chart 2 big win stop pattern information table. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (step A437), and the fanfare information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the fanfare information area (step A438). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

The game control device 100 then obtains time-saving judgment data corresponding to the stopping symbol number and saves it in the time-saving judgment data area (step A439). The time-saving judgment data includes information on whether or not there is a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving or no time-saving), and is used in the special jackpot 1 end processing and special jackpot 2 end processing described below. Next, it saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (or stopping symbol number, symbols B to G described below) (step A410). Then, it proceeds to the processing of step A451.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A431; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit or not, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A441). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A441; Y), the process proceeds to step A432 and subsequent steps, but a special chart 2 big hit pattern table and special chart 2 big hit stop pattern information table different from those used in the case of a small hit may be used.

If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A441; N), the game control device 100 judges whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A442). If the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A442; Y), a random number is loaded from the special chart 2 support hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A443) and the special chart 2 support hit pattern table is set (step A444). Then, by referring to the special chart 2 support hit pattern table, the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (step A445). Next, the stop pattern pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the stop pattern pattern area (step A446), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A447). After that, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (step A448), and processing proceeds to step A451.

When the small win flag 2 is not a small win (step A431; N), the big win flag 2 is not a big win (step A441; N), and the support win flag 2 is not a support win (step A442; N), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (step A449) and saves the loss stop pattern pattern in the stop pattern area (step A450). Then, it proceeds to the processing of step A451.

In this embodiment, since there is no "big win" as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of step A441 is optional and does not need to be executed. In other words, if the big win flag 2 is not a small win (step A431; N), the processing may proceed to step A442 without executing step A441.

After steps A440, A448, and A450, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special symbol 2 command in the decorative special symbol 2 command area as a performance command (step A451). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the performance command setting process (step A452). The decorative special chart 2 command is sent to the performance control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (step A453), and clears the special chart 2 big win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A454). Also, if a small win pattern random number (step A141) is extracted, the special chart 2 small win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) may be cleared to 0. Then, the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process is terminated. Note that the above-mentioned pattern change control process causes the stop display of the stop pattern (big win pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or the stop pattern number to be executed on the special chart 2 display 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution means that executes the special chart 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the start winning port 36, and executes the special chart 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The game control device 100 also serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special drawing information setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart information setting process (steps A324, A334) in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time reduction) does not directly affect the allocation of the variation, and the presentation mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the allocation of the variation. The presentation mode is set to one of multiple presentation modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc. In addition, the variation may be directly allocated based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a first half variable group selection pointer table (step A461) and acquires a first half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (step A462). Next, it sets a first half variable group selection offset table (step A463) and acquires offset data corresponding to the target special pattern reservation number (special pattern 1 reservation number or special pattern 2 reservation number) and the stopping pattern pattern (step A464).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (step A465), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A466). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped pattern, the reserved number, and the presentation mode is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern before the start of the reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the machine, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of a miss when there are many reserved numbers, so in other cases than a miss, the reserved number does not affect the allocation of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes multiple fluctuation patterns, and when determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a later variable group selection pointer table (step A467) and acquires a later variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (step A468). Next, it sets a later variable group selection offset table (step A469) and acquires offset data corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols and the stopping symbol pattern of the target symbol (step A470).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (step A471), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 2 area (step A472), and ends the special chart information setting process. As a result, the variable allocation information 2 generated based on the type of stopped pattern, the reserved number, and the presentation mode is saved in the variable allocation information 2 area. This variable allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variable (type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variable group. However, since the occurrence rate of reach changes according to the reserved number only in the case of a miss (the occurrence rate of reach is lower when the reserved number is large), in the case of anything other than a miss, the reserved number does not affect the allocation of the latter half variable.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A326, A336) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation pattern is made up of a first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special chart fluctuation display game until the reach state is reached, and a second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state is reached until the end of the special chart fluctuation display game, and the second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (step A481), obtains and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (step A482), and loads and prepares the variable pattern random number 1 from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A483). In this embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the winning table is 1 byte in size, and the losing table is 2 byte in size. Since the occurrence rate of winning is lower than the occurrence rate of losing, and 1 byte is sufficient, the winning table is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, when there is a winning, only the lower value of the 2-byte variable pattern random number 1 is used. Also, since the occurrence rate of losing is higher than the occurrence rate of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the losing table is 2 byte in size.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special chart change display game is a loss (step A484), and if it is a loss (step A484; Y), it performs a 2-byte allocation process (step A485) and proceeds to step A487. If it is not a loss (step A484; N), it performs an allocation process (step A486) and proceeds to step A487.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table (later half fluctuation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares it (step A487), and loads and prepares the fluctuation pattern random number 2 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A488). Then, it executes the allocation process (step A489), obtains the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and saves it in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A490). This process sets the latter half fluctuation pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (step A491) and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation allocation information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A492). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A493), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A494). After that, the allocation process (step A495) is performed, the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the allocation is obtained and saved in the first half fluctuation number area (step A496), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated. This process sets the first half fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game is set. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern setting means for setting the fluctuation pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, from among multiple ones.

[2-byte allocation process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (step A485) in the variable pattern setting process will be described. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte allocation process. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special chart variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the data at the beginning of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in step A482) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (step A501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but in a latter half fluctuation group table that specifies only a latter half fluctuation selection table whose latter half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is a miss), there is no need for allocation, so the allocation value "0", i.e., the code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

If the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is a code without allocation (step A502; Y), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A507) and ends the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is not a code without allocation (step A502; N), it obtains the first allocation value specified in the selection table (later variable group table) (step A503).

Next, the allocation value obtained in step A503 is subtracted from the random number value prepared in step A483 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random number value (step A504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A505; N), the address is updated to the next allocation value (step A506), and the process proceeds to step A503 to carry out subsequent processes. That is, the allocation value next specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is obtained (step A503), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A505 (step A504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505; Y). As a result, one of at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (later half fluctuation group table) is selected. Then, when it is determined in step A505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (step A507), and the 2-byte allocation process is terminated.

[Allocation process]
Next, the details of the allocation process (steps A486, A489, A495) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the allocation process. The allocation process is a process for selecting the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (later half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in step A482, the latter half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A487, or the first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A493) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (step A511). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, a latter half fluctuation pattern (later half fluctuation number), or a first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number), but in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value "0", i.e., a code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, if the first data in the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is a code without allocation (step A512; Y), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A51 step A517), and ends the allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is not a code without allocation (step A512; N), it obtains the first allocation value specified in the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) (step A513).

The game control device 100 then subtracts the allocation value obtained in step A513 from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A483, step A488, and step A494 to calculate a new random number value (step A514), and determines whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A515; N), it updates the address to the next allocation value (step A516), and then proceeds to the processing of step A513 to carry out subsequent processing.

That is, the allocation value next specified in the target selection table (later fluctuation group table, later fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (step A513), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A515 (step A514), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515; Y). As a result, one of the later fluctuation selection tables, later fluctuation patterns (later fluctuation numbers), or first half fluctuation patterns (first half fluctuation numbers) is selected from at least one later fluctuation selection table, later half fluctuation pattern (later fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) specified in the target selection table (later fluctuation group table, later half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515; Y), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A517) and ends the allocation process.

[Variable start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variable start information setting process (steps A327, A337) in the special chart 1 variable start process and the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the variable display game to be started is a special chart 2 variable display game (step A521). If the variable display game to be started is not a special chart 2 variable display game but a special chart 1 variable display game (step A521; N), the random number storage area for the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A522). Next, a first half variable time value table is set (step A523), and the first half variable time value corresponding to the first half variable number is obtained (step A524). Furthermore, a second half variable time value table is set (step A525), and the second half variable time value corresponding to the second half variable number is obtained (step A526).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (step A527), and saves the added value (total variable time value) in the special game processing timer area (step A528). After that, it prepares a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number (step A529), prepares a variable command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variable number as a performance command (step A530), and performs a performance command setting process (step A531). Next, it updates the special pattern reservation number corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag indicating the starting variable pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) by -1 (step A532), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag (step A533). Next, it shifts the random number storage area (step A534), clears the free area after the shift (step A535), and ends the variable start information setting process.

When the variable display game to be started is the special chart 2 variable display game (step A521; Y), the game control device 100 first determines whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (step A536). When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (step A536; Y), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A522 onwards, as in the case where the variable display game to be started is the special chart 1 variable display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, the configuration may be such that the processing from step A522 onwards is executed even when the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support win.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (step A536; N), i.e., if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a miss, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value (total variable time value) corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the big win ends in the special chart game processing timer area (step A537).

Therefore, the variable time value of the special chart 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are set by allocation (lottery) and are not fixed, while the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is a fixed time value that is set for each number of special chart 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit. In other words, the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game is controlled by the number of rotations. It is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit to be a fixed time value.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation time value as a presentation command (step A538) and executes the processing from step A531 onwards.

In addition, when the support state (support state, normal power release pattern) related to the state (content) of the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the fluctuation time value may be set not only according to the number of times the special chart 2 fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, but also according to the support state.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special chart variable display game is set. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a judgment means for judging various random number values stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game based on the judgment information in the start memory.

Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games is then transmitted to the performance control device 300, which, based on the received information relating to the start of the special symbol variation display games, sets detailed performance content in the decorative special symbol variation display games according to the determined variation pattern. Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games includes a decorative special symbol reserved number command including information about the start memory number (reserved number), a decorative special symbol command including information about the stop symbol, and a variation command including information about the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game, and the commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special symbol command before the variation command, processing in the performance control device 300 can be carried out efficiently.

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the special chart change process (step A10) in the special chart game process will be described in detail. FIG 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart change process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing (the special symbol 2 change display game is running) (step A601). If the special symbol 2 is not changing, that is, if the special symbol 1 is changing (the special symbol 1 change display game is running) (step A601; N), the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step A602).

On the other hand, when the special chart 2 is changing (step A601; Y), the game control device 100 judges whether the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a small win or a big win (step A603). When the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a small win or a big win (step A603; Y), a display time corresponding to the stopped pattern is set (step A602). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stopped pattern (stop display), which is the result of the change display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, the configuration may proceed to the processing of step A602 even when the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a support win.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is not a small win or a big win, i.e., if it is a miss (step A603; N), the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 changes (the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the big win ends (step A604).

Therefore, the display time of the special chart 1 variable display game and the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win are not fixed times based on the stopping pattern pattern set by lottery, while the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is set fixedly for each number of special chart 2 changes (number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of the big win. It is also possible to configure the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be set fixedly.

In addition, as described below, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern) related to the state (content) of the normal power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) may be set according to the support state as well as the number of times the special chart 2 changes after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the display time set in step A602 or step A604 in the special chart game processing timer area (step A605). Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether normal power support is in progress (time-saving state) (step A606). If normal power support is not in progress (step A606; N), the processing proceeds to step A613. If normal power support is in progress (step A606; Y), the processing proceeds to step A607 to determine whether the special chart 1 variable display game has changed. If the special chart 1 variable display game has changed (step A607; Y), the processing proceeds to step A610.

If the change is for the special chart 2 change display game (step A607; N), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening change count 2 by -1 (decreases by 1) (step A608), and determines whether the time-shortening change count 2 is 0 (step A609). If the time-shortening change count 2 is 0 (step A609; Y), it executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (step A612).

If the time-shortening variation count 2 is not 0 (step A609; N), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening variation count 1 by -1 (decreases by 1) (step A610), and determines whether the time-shortening variation count 1 is 0 or not (step A611). If the time-shortening variation count 1 is not 0 (step A611; N), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A613. On the other hand, if the time-shortening variation count 1 is 0 (step A611; Y), the game control device 100 executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (step A612). After that, the game control device 100 executes the presentation mode information check process described below (step A613).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a process transition setting process during special chart display (step A614). In the process transition setting process during special chart display, the process number "2" related to the process during special chart display is set and the process number is saved in the special chart game process number area, the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation in the special chart 1 display 51 is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation in the special chart 2 display 52 is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then, the process during special chart fluctuation is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end setting process (step A612) in the special chart change process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time-saving end setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A621). Here, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, in the normal game state, since the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is very short or the probability of winning the normal chart variable display game is very low, there is no winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory is not generated. For this reason, if the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserve) remains as a remaining reserve at the time of the end of the time reduction, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal may continue (no inconvenience will occur even if this is done), and when the variable display of the special chart variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops, the OFF data of the jackpot 2 signal (a signal related to the end of the time reduction) may be output to an external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A622). As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving is output as a test signal to the test firing device. The signals regarding the end of the time-saving here are, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 change time-saving state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 change time-saving state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 change time-saving state signal, off data of the normal electric role 1 open extension state signal, and off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, a number indicating no time-saving is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (step A623), a normal symbol low probability & no time-saving flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (step A624), and a special symbol low probability & no time-saving flag is saved in the special symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (step A625).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the time-saving change count 1 area of the RWM where the time-saving change count 1 is stored (step A626), and clears the time-saving change count 2 area of the RWM where the time-saving change count 2 is stored (step A627). Then, it saves the signal related to the left-hit instruction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A628), and saves the number in the left-hit state in the game state display number 2 area of the RWM (step A629).

Then, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (step A630). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal game state, which is the period during which the base value (the ball payout rate in the normal game state) is calculated. Then, the time-saving end setting process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, it is possible to appropriately transition from the time-saving state (a state with a low probability of special charts and normal power support) to the normal game state (a state with a low probability of special charts and no normal power support).

[Performance mode information check process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode information check process (step A613) in the special chart change process will be described. FIG 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the presentation mode information check process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A641). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A641; Y), the presentation mode information check process ends. In this case, the presentation mode is not changed according to the number of special chart change display games that have been executed, and for example, a presentation mode that continues until the next big win is selected.

If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A641; N), the game control device 100 updates the number of remaining spins for the presentation, which is the number of times the special chart variable display game can be played until the presentation mode is changed, by -1 (step A642), and determines whether the number of remaining spins for the presentation has become 0 (step A643). Here, the number of remaining spins for the presentation is updated by -1 only if the game played this time is the main special chart variable display game, but it can also be configured to update by -1 if it is a non-main variable display game.

Depending on the game status, etc., one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed frequently, and the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed less frequently. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the performance control device 300 may store information indicating the main variable display game (special chart 1 or special chart 2) depending on the game status, etc.

If the number of remaining spins for the presentation is not 0 (step A643; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of remaining spins for the presentation is 0 (step A643; Y), i.e., if the presentation mode is to be changed from the next special chart change display game, the presentation mode information address table is set (step A644), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A645).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the presentation mode number of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the presentation mode number area in the RWM (step A646), acquires the remaining number of presentation rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the remaining number of presentation rotations area in the RWM (step A647), acquires next mode transition information of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A648).

When the presentation mode is changed due to the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variation count 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining presentation spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed to may be set to a specified remaining reserve number (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining reserve number is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends, and is the number of special chart 2 variations after the time-saving state ends. The remaining reserves are generated by winning the normal variation winning device 37, which is opened by a normal chart hit during the time-saving state. In this way, the remaining reserve consumption mode (Fig. 54) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the remaining reserves (special chart 2 reserves, special chart 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the presentation mode is changed when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by a normal winning hit during the time-saving state (corresponding to the later opening described later), is completed, the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed to may be set to the number of reserved special figures 2 at that time. This allows the mode after the normal power opening is finished (Fig. 71A) to be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the reserved special figures 2 after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by a normal winning hit during the time-saving state, is completed. Furthermore, in this case, the remaining number of spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed to by the end of the time-saving state (time-saving fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0) can be set to a predetermined value (for example, a value obtained by subtracting the number of time-saving times from 6) according to the number of time-saving times, to set the mode before the normal power opening is finished (Fig. 71A).

Furthermore, when switching the presentation mode due to the end of the time-saving state (time-saving fluctuation count 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be switched to may be set to the number of reserved special charts 2 at that time or a predetermined number less than the number of reserved special charts 2. In this way, the remaining reserved consumption mode occurring during time-saving (Fig. 71B) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the number of reserved special charts 2 at the end of the time-saving state or a predetermined number of remaining reserved (reserved special charts 2, special charts 2 start memory). The remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be switched to after the remaining reserved consumption mode occurring during time-saving can be set to a value (excess reserved number) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining reserved consumed in the remaining reserved consumption mode occurring during time-saving from the specified remaining reserved number (for example, 10). In this way, the excess reserved consumption mode (Fig. 71B) can be set as the presentation mode after the remaining reserved consumption mode occurring during time-saving.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on whether or not time reduction is enabled, and information on the presentation mode) corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (step A649), and determines whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (step A650). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (step A650; Y), i.e., if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

In addition, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the area for sending commands when power is restored (step A650; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the area for sending commands when power is restored (step A651), and a performance command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a performance command (step A652).

The game control device 100 then prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (step A653), and executes a presentation command setting process (step A654). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain the remaining number of rotations for presentation. Next, a time-shortening variation count command corresponding to time-shortening variation count 2 is prepared as a presentation command (step A655), and executes a presentation command setting process (step A656). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain time-shortening variation count 2. Note that the game control device 100 may also prepare time-shortening variation count 1 as a presentation command in the same way, and execute the presentation command setting process.

Next, when a new presentation mode number is acquired in step A646, the game control device 100 determines whether the new presentation mode is a left-hit mode (step A657), and if it is not a left-hit mode (step A657; N), ends the presentation mode information check process. Also, if it is a left-hit mode (step A657; Y), it prepares a left-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (step A658), executes the presentation command setting process (step A659), and ends the presentation mode information check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the result of the determination of whether the remaining number of rotations for the effect is 0 or not (step A643), a number of rotations for the effect command corresponding to the updated remaining number of rotations for the effect (step A642) and a number of time-shortening fluctuations command corresponding to the updated number of time-shortening fluctuations 1 and 2 (steps A608 and A610) may also be prepared as the effect command, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special chart display]
Next, the details of the special chart display process (step A11) in the special chart game process will be described. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart display process. Fig. 40 shows the first half of the special chart display process, and Fig. 41 shows the second half of the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not what was executed this time was a change in special chart 1 (step A701). In other words, it determines whether or not the display of the stopped pattern (stop display) is related to the special chart 1 change display game. If what was executed this time was a change in special chart 1 (step A701; Y), it loads the jackpot flag 1 (step A702), clears the jackpot flag 1 area (step A703), and determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A704).

If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A704; Y), the game control device 100 saves condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating in the condition device operation information area (step A705) and proceeds to processing of step A706. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A704; N), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing of step A711.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a special chart normal processing transition setting process (step A706). In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the process number related to the special chart normal processing is set to 0, the process number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, and the variable chart discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the special chart display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the current execution is a change in special chart 2 (step A701; N), the game control device 100 loads jackpot flag 2 (step A707) and clears the jackpot flag 2 area (step A708). It determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot or not (step A709). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A709; Y), the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (step A700), and processing proceeds to step A706. If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A709; N), that is, if it is a small jackpot or a miss, processing proceeds to step A711.

In this embodiment, since there is no "jackpot" as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of steps A707 to A710 is optional and does not need to be executed. In other words, after step A701, the process may proceed to step A711.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special chart is currently in a high probability state (in a special probability state) (step A711). If the special chart is not in a high probability state (step A711; N), it determines whether or not there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special chart variable display game has been played has reached the ceiling number of times (time-saving ceiling) (step A712).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A712; N), the game control device 100 updates the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM by +1 (increases by 1) (step A7113). Then, it is determined whether the number of times (i.e., the ceiling counter value) that the special chart variable display game (including the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state has reached the ceiling number (step A714). For example, the ceiling number is 500 times. If the ceiling number has been reached (step A714; Y), a ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction will occur and a ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number has been reached are set (on) (step A715). It is also possible to combine the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag into a single flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, if the ceiling number of times is reached and the time-saving number of times ends without a jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on), so the ceiling time-saving will not occur from then on and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, if the special chart has a high probability of winning (in a special chance state) (step A7111; Y), if there is a ceiling-reached flag (step A712; Y), or if the ceiling count has not been reached (step A714; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (step A716).

Next, if the small win flag 2 is a small win (step A716; Y), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a presentation command (step A717) and executes the presentation command setting process (step A718). Then, it loads and prepares the decorative special chart 2 command from the decorative special chart 2 command area as a presentation command (step A719) and executes the presentation command setting process (step A720). After that, it executes the small win pre-release processing transition setting process (step A721) and ends the processing during the special chart display.

In the small win release pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number for the small win release pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the time before the small win is released (e.g., 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area. In addition, a signal related to the start of the small win game (e.g., turning on the big win 1 signal (output on big win and small win)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, when the small win flag 2 is not a small win, that is, when it is a miss (step A716; N), the game control device 100 judges whether or not there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving will occur (step A722). When there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag (step A722; Y), the initial value that will be the ceiling time-saving number (the number of times time-saving due to the ceiling time-saving) is saved in the time-saving fluctuation number 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation number 2 area (step A723). The initial values of the time-saving fluctuation number 1 and the time-saving fluctuation number 2 in the case of the ceiling time-saving described above (for example, 704 times and 700 times) are saved here. The initial values may be determined by lottery. Next, in order to generate a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving, a support operation setting process is executed (step A727), a special chart normal processing transition setting process is executed (step A728), and the special chart display processing is terminated. In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number "0" related to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If there is no ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that a ceiling time-saving will occur (step A722; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A724). If the support hit flag 2 does not indicate a support hit (step A724; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A725).

When either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A724; Y or step A725; Y), the game control device 100 saves the initial values corresponding to the time reduction judgment data in the time reduction change count 1 area and the time reduction change count 2 area (step A726). The initial values of the time reduction change count 1 and the time reduction change count 2 in the case of a support hit result (sudden time reduction) described above (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) are saved here. Next, the support operation setting process is executed to generate a time reduction state (sudden time reduction) by the time reduction pattern (step A727), the special chart normal processing transition setting process is executed (step A728), and the special chart display processing is terminated.

The time-shortening judgment data is set in correspondence with the stop pattern number in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (step A323) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (step A333), so the initial value in the case of a support hit result (i.e., the number of time-shortening times) is determined by lottery using the support hit pattern random number.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hits (step A724; N and step A725; N), the game control device 100 does not execute the support activation setting process to set the time reduction, but executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (step A728), and ends the special chart display processing.

As described above, in the special chart display process, the settings for the ceiling time-saving and sudden time-saving are performed, such as setting the number of time-saving times (i.e., the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations). In addition, in the case of time-saving due to a jackpot, that is, time-saving that starts from the end of the jackpot state, the settings for the time-saving are performed in the jackpot end process, such as setting the number of time-saving times.

The special chart display process is executed when the special chart game process timer, to which the stop display time (step A605) is set, reaches 0 (steps A5, A11), and is therefore executed when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or immediately before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (approximately the same as when the next special chart variation display game starts, if it does), the number of time-shortening changes (steps A723, A726) is set, and the time-shortening state due to the ceiling time-shortening and sudden time-shortening begins.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (step A727) during the special chart display process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time-saving in the external information output data area (step A731). As a result, when the ceiling time-saving due to reaching the ceiling number of times and the sudden start of time-saving due to the time-saving pattern (support hit) begin, the signal related to the start of time-saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and ultimately to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the start of time-saving is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (e.g., 128 msec) is saved in the time-saving signal control timer area (step A732). This timer initial value becomes the time to output the jackpot 3 signal by the external information editing process described below.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (step A733). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the test firing test device. The signals related to the start of time reduction here are, for example, on data of the special pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, on data of the special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, on data of the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, on data of the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and on data of the normal electric role 1 open extension state signal. Then, a number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A734), a normal pattern high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step A735), and a special pattern time reduction flag is synthesized in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A736). Next, a signal related to a right-hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A737), and the number in the right-hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A738).

Then, the game control device 100 sets a presentation mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (step A739), obtains the address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (step A323) or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (step A333) (step A740), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode based on the table (step A741). This allows the presentation mode to be transitioned to at the start of the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction to be selected.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode based on the table (step A742). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation is the number of time-saving times (the initial value of time-saving variation times 1 or time-saving variation times 2). This allows the same presentation mode to continue until the time-saving time ends, for example.

Then, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on the transition from the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving presentation mode to the next mode, based on the table (step A743). Then, it prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (step A744), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A745), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (step A746). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time-saving (normal power support), and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the number of remaining rotations for presentation as a presentation command (step A747), and executes a presentation command setting process (step A748). Then, it prepares a time-shortening change count command corresponding to each of time-shortening change count 1 and time-shortening change count 2 (here, the initial value of the time-shortening change count) as a presentation command (step A749), and executes a presentation command setting process (step A750).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the time-saving judgment data area (step A751), clears the presentation mode transition information area (step A752), and ends the jackpot end process. In addition, at this point, the ceiling time-saving activation flag area in which the ceiling time-saving activation flag is stored because the ceiling time-saving activation has been activated may be cleared.

[Gem Game Processing]
Next, the details of the bonus game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the bonus game process. In the bonus game process, the whole process related to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower large winning hole switch monitoring process (step B1). In the lower large winning hole switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball is monitored by a count switch (lower large winning hole switch 38a) provided in the special variable winning device 38.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the bonus game processing timer by -1 (subtracts 1) if it is not 0 (step B2). By updating the bonus game processing timer by -1, the bonus game processing timer will measure the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. The minimum value of the bonus game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the bonus game processing timer is 0 (step B3). If the bonus game processing timer is not 0 (step B3; N), the bonus game processing is terminated.

When the bonus game processing timer is 0 (step B3; Y), i.e., when the timer is up or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a bonus game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number (step B4). Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number using the bonus game sequence branch table (step B5). Next, a subroutine call is made using the bonus game processing number, and game branch processing according to the bonus game processing number is executed (step B6).

If the game processing number is "0" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes normal reel processing, which performs settings for the start of a big win, etc. (step B7). For example, in the normal reel processing, the processing number "1" relating to fanfare processing is set in a predetermined case and saved in the reel game processing number area. Details of the normal reel processing will be described later in FIG. 44.

If the game processing number is "1" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes fanfare processing (step B8). For example, in fanfare processing, the processing number for interval processing is set to "2" and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes the interval processing (step B9). For example, in the interval processing, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the lower large prize opening time is saved in the special feature game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the lower large prize opening solenoid output data area, the round command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "3" related to the jackpot opening processing is set and saved in the special feature game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot opening process (step B10) that sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and an ending command if the jackpot round is the final round, and sets information required for jackpot remaining ball processing. For example, in the jackpot opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and the processing number "4" for jackpot remaining ball processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot remaining ball process (step B11) that sets the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot opening to be discharged if the jackpot round is the final round, and sets the information required to perform the jackpot end process. For example, in the jackpot remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, and the processing number "2" related to the interval process is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, and the processing number "5" related to the jackpot end process is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process that sets information necessary for executing normal reel processing (step B12). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the time-saving determination data that includes information on whether or not there is a time-saving state after the jackpot ends (time-saving or not), necessary information such as the normal power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state ends is set, and the processing number "0" related to the normal reel processing is set and saved in the reel game processing number area.

[Normal processing of role objects]
Next, the details of the normal feature processing (step B7) in the above-mentioned feature game processing will be described. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal feature processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the condition device is in operation (step B301). If the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (steps A204, A645, A650), that is, if there is jackpot information in jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or if there is a win in specific area 72 (V winning port) (input to specific area switch 72a, V winning), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the condition device is not in operation (step B301; N), the normal reel processing is terminated.

When the condition device is operating (step B301; Y), the game control device 100 saves the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value area (step B302). Next, it saves the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round LED output pointer area (step B303), prepares a probability information command (normal) as a presentation command (step B304), and executes the presentation command setting process (step B305).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a performance command (step B306), and executes the performance command setting process (step B307). Then, it loads a decorative special symbol command (decorative special symbol 1 command or decorative special symbol 2 command) from the decorative special symbol command area of the special symbol that resulted in the current big win or small win, prepares it as a performance command (step B308), and executes the performance command setting process (step B309).

Then, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (step B310), and saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (step B311). Then, it saves an initial value in the round number area (step B312). The initial value is 0 if the condition device is in operation due to jackpot information, and is 1 if the condition device is in operation due to a win in the specific area 72 (V win).

The game control device 100 then executes a fanfare mid-processing transition setting process (step B313) and ends the normal reel processing. For example, in the fanfare mid-processing transition setting process, the process number for the fanfare mid-processing is set to "1" and the process number is saved in the reel game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the reel game processing timer area.

In the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction change count 1 area in which the time reduction change count 1 is stored, the time reduction change count 2 area in which the time reduction change count 2 is stored, the ceiling counter area in which the ceiling counter value is stored, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area in which the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the normal low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area, and the special low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special game mode flag area. The ceiling counter area in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special game change display game has been executed in a state other than the probability change state is stored is cleared here when a jackpot occurs, but as described above, it does not need to be cleared when a normal power outage is restored (RAM initialization switch 112 is not on).

Furthermore, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the start of a jackpot (special game state) (for example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output for a jackpot or small jackpot), turning on the jackpot 4 signal (output for a jackpot)) in the external information output data area. Then, it saves signals related to the end of the high probability state and time-saving state (for example, turning off the special pattern 1 high probability state signal, turning off the special pattern 2 high probability state signal, turning off the special pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal, turning off the special pattern 2 variable time-saving state signal, turning off the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, turning off the normal pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal, turning off the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal) in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step B12) in the bonus game process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the time-shortening determination data (steps A409, A439) is data with time-shortening (step B401). Data with time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will occur after the jackpot state ends. Data without time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time-shortening determination data indicates no time-shortening, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 1 to transition to a normal game state after the jackpot ends (step B402), and when the time-shortening determination data indicates time-shortening, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 2 to transition to a time-shortening state (normal power support state) after the jackpot ends (step B403).

The game control device 100 sets a presentation mode information address table (step B404), obtains the address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information (steps A410, A440) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or the stop 2 symbol setting process (step B405), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot state (step B406). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to transition to after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode that will be set after the special game state ends (step B407). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation is the number of time-saving times (initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations) or the total number of time-saving times and the specified number of remaining reserved times (for example, 10 times). This allows the same presentation mode to continue, for example, after the end of a jackpot, until the time-saving times end, or until all of the special chart 2 variable display games related to the remaining reserved times have been executed.

Then, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on the transition from the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state, to the next mode (step B409). Then, it prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (step B409), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (step B410), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (step B411). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time reduction (normal power support), and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the number of remaining rotations for presentation as a presentation command (step B412), and executes a presentation command setting process (step B413).Then, it prepares a time reduction change count command corresponding to the number of time reduction changes (here, the initial value of the number of time reductions, for example, 5 or less or 99) as a presentation command (step B414), and executes a presentation command setting process (step B415).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the presentation mode transition information area (step B416), executes the normal reel processing transition setting process (step B417), and ends the jackpot end process. In the normal reel processing transition setting process, in order to transition to normal reel processing, the process number for normal reel processing is set to "0", the process number is saved in the reel game processing number area, the condition device operation information area is cleared, and the time reduction judgment data area is cleared.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step B402) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (step B421), and saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (step B422). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, off data of the jackpot 1 signal, off data of the jackpot 2 signal, off data of the jackpot 3 signal, and off data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. The jackpot end setting process 1 is a process for when there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot state, so the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game status display number 2 area as the display data for the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (step B423).

The game control device 100 then saves a low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (step B424), and saves a special no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area (step B425). It then clears the time reduction variation count area (step B426), saves the number in the left hit state in the game status display number 1 area as the display data for the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (step B427), and ends the jackpot end setting process 1.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step B403) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (step B431), and saves the signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (step B432). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the off data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the off data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step B433), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step B434). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process for entering a time reduction state (normal power support state) after the end of the jackpot state, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the time reduction (in this embodiment, the jackpot 2 signal is output during the jackpot state, so the on state of the jackpot 2 signal continues).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number during time-saving in the game status display number 2 area as display data for the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (step B435), saves a high probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (step B436), and saves a special time-saving flag in the special game mode flag area (step B437).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the special chart 2 variable display game has become a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, whether the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation has become a jackpot (step B438). If the special chart 1 variable display game becomes a jackpot or if the special chart 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot during the time reduction state (step B438; N), the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count) corresponding to the stop pattern (or stop pattern number, patterns A to F described later) is saved in the time reduction variable count area (step B439), and processing from step B441 onwards is executed. Here, the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count) becomes the initial value of the time reduction variable count 2 (first predetermined count described later). In addition to the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count) for the time reduction variable count 2, in step B439, the initial value of the time reduction variable count 1 (second predetermined count described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time-saving change count 1 may be the initial value of the time-saving change count 2 plus the maximum value of the reserved number of special charts 1 (first start memory number) (e.g., 4).

When the special chart 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, when the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation becomes a jackpot (step B438; Y), the game control device 100 saves the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count, here 99) in the time reduction variable count area (step B440). Here, the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count) becomes the initial value of the time reduction variable count 2 (first predetermined count described later). In addition to the time reduction variable count initial value (time reduction count) for the time reduction variable count 2, in step B440, the initial value of the time reduction variable count 1 (second predetermined count described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time reduction variable count 1 may be the initial value of the time reduction variable count 2 plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special chart 1 reservation count (first start memory count).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the type of support state (support state, normal power release pattern), which is the state (state) of normal power support, in the support state area corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbols A to G described below) (step B441). Note that the processing of step B441 is optional, and is executed when the support state relating to the state (content) of normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below.

The game control device 100 then saves the number in the right-hit state in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (step B442), prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (step B443), executes the presentation command setting process (step B444), and ends the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Fuzu Game Processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the normal game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal game change display game is controlled, and the display of the normal game is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process to monitor input from the gate switch 34a (step C1). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process to monitor the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (step C2). The details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, if the normal game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (step C3). The minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (step C4).

When the value of the regular game processing timer is 0 (step C4; Y), i.e., when the timer is up or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a regular game sequence branch table to be referenced in order to branch to the process corresponding to the regular game processing number (step C5).

The game control device 100 then obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular game process number based on the regular game sequence branch table that has been set (step C6). Then, it makes a subroutine call based on the regular game process number and executes the game branch process according to the regular game process number (step C7).

When the game processing number is "0" in step C7, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the fluctuation of the normal map fluctuation display game, and executes the normal map normal processing (step C8) to set the start of fluctuation of the normal map fluctuation display game, set the performance, and set information necessary for performing processing during the normal map fluctuation. Details of the normal map normal processing will be described later.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change process that sets information necessary to perform normal map display process (step C9). For example, in the normal map change process, in order to transition to the normal map display process, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "2" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes normal map display processing to set the normal power release time and set information necessary for normal map hit processing if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win (step C10). For example, in the normal map display processing, if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map hit processing, while if the result is a loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map normal processing.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes normal winning processing to continue the normal winning processing or to set information required to perform normal remaining ball processing (step C11). For example, in the normal winning processing, after making settings to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to move to normal remaining ball processing.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes a normal game remaining ball process that sets the information necessary to perform a normal game end process (step C12). For example, in the normal game remaining ball process, in order to move to a normal game end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time is saved in the normal game processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes a normal hit end process (step C13) that sets information necessary for normal hit processing (step C8). For example, in the normal hit end process, in order to transition to normal hit processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal hit game processing number area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a regular symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display 53 (step C14). Then, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the regular symbol (regular symbol) by the regular symbol display 53 (step C15), and ends the regular symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (step C4; N), i.e., if the timer has not timed out, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step C114 onwards.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step C1 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first judges whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step C101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step C101; Y), it judges whether the game state is for right-hitting (step C102). The game state for right-hitting is the jackpot state and the time-saving state (normal power support state). If it is in the game state for right-hitting (step C102; Y), it moves to the processing of step C105. If it is not in the game state for right-hitting (step C102; N), it prepares a left-hitting instruction notification command (left-hitting instruction command) as a presentation command (step C103), and executes the presentation command setting process (step C104). The presentation control device 300 that has received the left-hitting instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left on the display device 41, etc. by displaying a left-hitting instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal maps and judges whether the reserved normal map number is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (step C105). If the reserved normal map number is less than the upper limit (step C105; Y), the game control device 100 judges whether the normal map change display game is changing (running) or in a normal map hit state (step C106). If the normal map change display game is not changing or in a normal map hit state (step C106; N), the reserved normal map number is updated by +1 (step C107). In this way, the reserved normal map number is updated by +1 only when the normal map change display game is not changing or in a normal map hit state, and the reserved normal map is consumed as soon as it is updated by +1, so the reserved normal map is not actually accumulated and becomes 1 only momentarily just before the normal map change display game starts (the reserved normal map number is essentially 0).

Then, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved regular symbols (step C108). Then, it extracts the winning random number and saves it in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step C109), extracts the winning symbol random number and saves it in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7710), and ends the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 ends the gate switch monitoring process if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step C101; N), if it is determined that the number of reserved regular figures is not less than the upper limit (step C105; N), or if the regular figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating or in a regular figure winning state (step C106; Y).

[Regular electricity entry switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process (step C2) in the normal game process will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal power winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a normal winning is occurring, that is, whether or not the normal winning display game is in a winning state and the normal winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations (step C201). If a normal winning is occurring (step C201; Y), it then determines whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step C202). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step C202; Y), the count number of the normal power counter is updated by +1 (step C203).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the count number of the updated normal power counter has reached an upper limit value (e.g., 10) (step C204). If the count number has reached the upper limit value (step C204; Y), the game control device 100 loads the win end pointer value (e.g., 2) from the normal win end pointer area in the RWM and saves it in the normal win control pointer area in the RWM (step C205).

Finally, the normal game processing timer is cleared (step C206), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if a normal power winning occurs that is equal to or exceeds the upper limit during a normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal winning process control pointer area at that point, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, ending the normal winning state midway.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 determines that a normal win is not occurring (step C201; N), if it determines that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step C202; N), or if it determines that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step C204; N), it ends the normal win switch monitoring process.

[Normal processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (step C8) in the normal game process will be described. Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (step C301). If the number of reserved normal figures is not 0 (step C301; N), it loads a winning random number from the RWM's random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1), loads a winning pattern random number from the RWM's random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1), and clears the random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1) and the random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1) after loading to 0 (step C302). Furthermore, it determines whether the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether it is in a time-saving state (normal power support state) (step C303). In this embodiment, the range of the winning random number is 0 to 250, the probability of a normal winning in the high probability range is 251/251, and the probability of a normal winning in the low probability range is 0/251. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of a normal winning in the low probability range may be a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of a normal game (step C303; N), it sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251), which is the lower limit judgment value during the low probability of a normal game (step C304); if the game control device 100 is in the high probability of a normal game (step C303; Y), it sets a high probability lower limit judgment value (here, 0), which is the lower limit judgment value during the high probability of a normal game (step C305), and proceeds to processing in step C306.

The game control device 100 determines whether the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (here, 251) (step C306). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to both the normal high probability and the normal low probability. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step C306; Y), i.e., if it is a miss, the process proceeds to step C308. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (step C306; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step C307).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step C307; Y), i.e., if it is a loss, the game control device 100 saves the loss information in the winning flag area (step C308). Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets the loss stop pattern number as the normal stop pattern number (step C309), saves the loss pattern information in the normal stop pattern information area (step C310), and proceeds to the processing of step C314.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step C307; N), i.e., if there is a win, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (step C311), sets the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number (step C312), saves the winning stop pattern information corresponding to the winning stop pattern number in the normal stop pattern information area (step C313), and proceeds to the processing of step C314. Note that here, there is only one type of winning stop pattern (normal winning pattern), but there may be several types in the modified example described below.

The game control device 100 then saves the stop pattern number in the regular stop pattern area (step C314), saves the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (step C315), shifts the regular random number storage area (step C316), clears the free area after the shift to 0 (step C317), and updates the regular reserved number by -1 (step C318).

In other words, as the regular map change display game for the oldest regular map reserved number 1 is played, the ranks of regular map reserved numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after regular map reserved number 1 are moved up by one. This process clears the value for regular map reserved number 1 in the regular map random number storage area to 0, and decrements the regular map reserved number by 1 to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 loads information on the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) (step C319). Note that the processing of step C319 is optional, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of normal power support, is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal map fluctuation time (e.g., 200 msec) and saves it in the normal map game processing timer area (step C320). Note that when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern), which is the state (state) of the normal power support, is variable as in the modified example described below, a variable normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set and saved in the normal map game processing timer area. Then, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed (step C321), and the normal map normal processing is terminated. Note that the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, if the number of reserved normal games is 0 (step C301; Y), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal normal game processing (step C322) and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step C323). After that, it saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (step C324) and ends normal normal game processing.

[General map change processing transition setting processing]
52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process. The normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed in step C321 in the normal map normal processing.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as the processing number for transitioning to normal game fluctuation processing (step C331), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step C332).

Then, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the normal map change display game (normal pattern 1 change signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step C333), and saves a change-in-progress flag indicating that the normal map change display game is changing in the normal map change control flag area (step C334). Then, it saves the blinking control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking period of the normal map display, in the normal map blinking control timer area (step C335), and saves the initial value (here, 0) in the normal map change pattern number area (step C336). Then, the normal map change processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the normal map fluctuation process (step C9) in the normal map game process will be described. Figure 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal map fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to processing during the normal map display (step C401), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (step C402). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (normal map stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map change display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (step C403).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern change (turning off the normal pattern 1 change signal) in the test signal output data area (step C404). Then, it saves a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern change display game is stopped in the normal pattern change control flag area (step C405), and ends the normal pattern change process.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process during normal map display (step C10) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) that was set in the normal processing (step C501) and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (step C502). Then, it determines whether hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (step C503).

When the winning information is set in the winning flag (step C503; Y), the game control device 100 sets the winning processing setting table (step C504), obtains the winning start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information, and saves it in the normal win control pointer area (step C505). Also, obtains the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal stop pattern information, and saves it in the normal win end pointer area (step C506). Next, obtains the normal power release time (e.g., 3000 msec) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information, and saves it in the normal game processing timer area (step C507). The above processing sets the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 during the time-saving state, and for example, two openings are possible. In addition, there is only one type of winning regular stop pattern (regular winning pattern), and the winning start pointer value, winning end pointer value, and regular power release time are fixed, but if the support state (support mode, regular power release pattern) for regular power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the winning start pointer value, winning end pointer value, and regular power release time corresponding to the support state can be set and saved in the regular game processing timer area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number for transitioning to normal symbol hit processing (step C508), and saves the processing number in the normal symbol game processing number area (step C509). After that, it saves a signal related to a hit in the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol 1 hit signal is turned on) and a signal related to the start of normal power operation (normal electric device 1 operation signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (step C510). Furthermore, it saves on data in the normal power solenoid output data area to output a signal to drive (turn on) the normal power solenoid (step C511).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (step C512), and clears the information in the normal power illegal winning number area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power illegal monitoring period (step C513). Finally, a flag that specifies the outside of the illegal monitoring period for the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal power illegal monitoring period flag area (step C514).

If the winning information is not set in the winning flag (step C503; N), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal game processing (step C515) and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step C516). After that, it saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (step C517) and ends the normal game display processing.

[Normal processing during the trial]
Next, the details of the normal winning process (step C11) in the normal game process will be described. Figure 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal winning process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the normal hit control pointer (step C601), and determines whether the value of the loaded normal hit control pointer has reached the normal hit control pointer upper limit value (hit end pointer value) (step C602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal hit has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (the hit end pointer value) (step C602; N), the game control device 100 updates the control pointer during the normal hit by +1 (step C603). Furthermore, it executes the normal power operation transition setting process (step C604) and ends the normal hit process. The details of the normal power operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during a normal hit reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during a normal hit (the hit end pointer value) (step C602; Y), the game control device 100 executes the normal power operation transition setting process (step C604) and ends the normal hit processing, without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal hit processing control pointer area in step C603.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step C604) during the normal winning process will be described. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (regular winning control pointer) (step C611). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before it was updated in step C603. An example of the control pointer is shown in FIG. 73 described later. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step C612 to control the blocking of the regular variable winning device 37, and the wait time after the blocking of the regular variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer (regular power interval time, for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the regular game processing timer area (step C612). Note that, when the support state (support mode, regular power opening pattern) for the regular power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the wait time (regular power interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step C613), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the processing of step C614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and saves the normal power opening time, which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, in the normal game processing timer area (step C614). The normal power opening time here may be the same as the value set in step C507 (e.g., 3000 msec). Furthermore, to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, on data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area (step C615), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 100 proceeds to step C616, ends the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the normal remaining ball processing (step C12), by setting the processing number to "4" (step C616) and saving the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step C617).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the normal power remaining ball processing time (e.g., 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (step C618). After that, it saves off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to set the normal power solenoid 37c to off (step C619), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process. Note that, when the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) regarding the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the normal power remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Processing of remaining normal electric bulbs]
Next, the details of the remaining normal ball process (step C12) in the normal game process will be described. Figure 57 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the remaining normal ball process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "5" for the normal hit end processing (step C701) and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step C702). After that, it saves the normal game ending time (e.g., 100 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (step C703). Note that when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) for the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the normal game ending time may be set according to the support state.

The game control device 100 then saves a signal related to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turning off the normal electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (step C704). Next, it clears the normal electric count area that counts the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (step C705), and further clears the normal winning control pointer area (step C706). After that, it clears the normal winning end pointer area (step C707), and ends the normal electric remaining ball processing.

[Normal map end processing]
Next, the details of the normal winning end process (step C13) in the normal game process will be described. Figure 58 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal winning end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "0" for normal symbol normal processing (step C801), and then saves the processing number in the normal symbol game processing number area (step C802). After that, it saves the signal related to the end of the normal symbol variable game win (the signal is turned off when one normal symbol is hit) in the test signal output data area (step C803).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (fraudulent monitoring period flag) that specifies the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step C804), and then ends the normal winning end process.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step X119) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Figures 59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the external information editing process. Figure 59 shows the first half of the external information editing process, and Figure 60 shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step X107), the winning port switch/status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X115), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X116), the information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device of the game center, or a test firing test device is created and set in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X501; N), it determines whether a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (step X502). If a main frame opening error is not occurring (step X502; N), it saves the off data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (step X503), and saves the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step X504).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X501; Y) or if a main frame opening error is occurring (step X502; Y), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (step X505) and saves the on data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X506).

After steps X504 and X506, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (step X507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (step X508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (set value change switch) or the like (step X46 of the main processing). The security signal control timer then starts timing from the time the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X508; N), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step X509) and proceeds to processing of step X510. In other words, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (step X508; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (step X510). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (step X510; N), it further determines whether or not board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X511). If there is a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

If the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X511; N), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X512). If there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X512; N), it further determines whether or not large prize winning port fraud is occurring (step X513). Note that if the prize winning port switch/status monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag for the large prize winning port in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that large prize winning port fraud is occurring. If the large prize winning port fraud is not occurring (step X513; N), it further determines whether or not normal power fraud is occurring (step X514). Note that if the prize winning port switch/status monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag for the second start prize winning port of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that normal power fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (step X514; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not vibration fraud is occurring (step X515). Note that if there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (step X515; N), it determines whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step X516). Note that if the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X118), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step X516; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a V-passing error is occurring (step X517). If a detection signal of the specific area switch 72a is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V-passing error is occurring. If a V-passing error is not occurring (step X517; N), it determines whether or not a remaining ball error, which is an error related to the remaining ball, is occurring (step X518). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step X518; N), it determines whether or not the safety device is operating based on the safety device operation flag (step X519). If the safety device is not operating (step X519; N), it determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X520).

If a switch abnormality error such as a disconnected switch connector is not occurring (step X520; N), the gaming control device 100 saves the off data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step X521). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X520; Y), the gaming control device 100 saves the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step X523).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (step X510; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X511; Y), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X512; Y), large prize slot fraud is occurring (step X513; Y), normal radio wave fraud is occurring (step X514; Y), vibration fraud is occurring (step X515; Y), abnormal discharge error is occurring (step X516; Y), V passage error is occurring (step X517; Y), remaining ball error is occurring (step X518; Y), safety device is operating (step X519; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X522), and the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X523). By setting the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device operation flag = 1.

In this way, when the safety device is in operation (step X519; Y), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (step X522), allowing the amusement facility manager or staff to recognize that the safety device is in operation. In addition to a configuration in which the security signal is continuously output to an external device while the safety device is in operation, a configuration in which the security signal is output to an external device for only one pulse (e.g., 256 ms) when the safety device is activated is also possible. Furthermore, instead of or in combination with the security signal, external information may be provided exclusively for the safety device, and dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is in operation.

In addition, if the safety device is in operation (step X519; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the gaming machine error state signal is output to the test firing test device as a test signal. Note that it is also possible to configure the device so that the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the safety device being in operation is not output. Also, a test signal other than the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test firing test device.

After steps X521 and X523, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process to edit the winning signal of the start port (step X524). Next, it executes a main prize ball signal editing process to set information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (step X525), and executes a pattern determination count signal editing process to output to an external device a pattern determination count signal generated when the stop pattern of the special pattern variation display game is determined (step X526).

Next, if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (step X527), and determines whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 or not (step X528). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (step X528; Y), the external information editing process ends as is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (step X528; N), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X529), and the external information editing process ends.

In this way, when the ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times and the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern (support hit) start, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as an amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. Here, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output for the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time reduction signal control timer area in step A732 of the support operation setting process described above. Conventionally, the jackpot 1 to 4 signals were output during the period of the jackpot, etc., but the output of the jackpot 3 signal is an output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) that is much shorter than the period of the jackpot, etc. For this reason, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times or the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern, without confusing it with a jackpot or the time reduction following a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the jackpot 2 signal is output to the external device as external information for a long period of time during the jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (time-saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time-saving state). The jackpot 3 signal of the short fixed time (e.g. 128 msec) described above is output to the external device as external information indicating the occurrence of a time-saving state due to a ceiling time-saving state or a sudden time-saving state (second specific game state, second time-saving state) in distinction from external information indicating a time-saving state due to a jackpot (long-term jackpot 2 signal), and is not confused by the external device.

As another configuration, the jackpot 3 signal may be output for a fixed time only for one of the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction at the start of the time reduction. Also, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction, in one of the time reductions, both the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction, and in the other time reduction, only the jackpot 3 signal may be output. For example, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and only the jackpot 3 signal may be output for the sudden time reduction (or vice versa). Also, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction at the start of the time reduction, the jackpot 3 signal (or the jackpot 4 signal) may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal (or the jackpot 3 signal) may be output for the sudden time reduction. In this way, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction so that an external device can recognize it.

[External information or test signal transmission]
FIG. 61 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or a test signal.

Figure 61 (a) shows a case where the ceiling number of times is reached or the time-saving symbol stops in the last special chart change display game in the previous time-saving state (the special chart change display game in which the time-saving number of times is reached) and the next special chart change display game leads to a later time-saving state (a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time-saving state ends is the timing at which the time-saving end setting process (step A612, FIG. 37) is executed in the special chart change process, i.e., the timing at which the change display of the previous special chart change display game stops. Also, the timing at which the subsequent time-saving state (ceiling time-saving state or sudden time-saving state) starts is the timing at which the number of time-saving changes (steps A723, A726) is set in the special chart display process, i.e., the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special chart change display game ends (approximately equal to the timing at which the next special chart change display game starts, if it starts).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special chart variable display game stops, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal related to the end of the time-saving function by the time-saving end setting process within the special chart variable process and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (step A621), and the off data of the variable time-saving state signal (special pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal, special pattern 2 variable time-saving state signal, normal pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal) is set in the test signal output data area as a signal related to the end of the time-saving function and output to the test firing test device (step A622). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time-saving state signal as test signal are turned off after the variable display of the previous special chart variable display game stops (after the previous time-saving function ends).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special pattern change display game ends, the support operation setting process sets the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area and outputs it to an external device (such as a hall computer) (step A731), and sets the ON data of the change time shortening state signal (special pattern 1 change time shortening state signal, special pattern 2 change time shortening state signal, normal pattern 1 change time shortening state signal) as a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area and outputs it to the test firing test device (step A733). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the change time shortening state signal as a test signal become ON after the display of the stop result of the previous special pattern change display game ends.

In this way, when the special chart change display game (previous special chart change display game) where the time-saving ends reaches the ceiling number of times or stops on the time-saving pattern, it becomes clear that the time-saving has ended. Also, by turning off the output of external information (jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (variation time reduction status signal, etc.) for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), when the time-saving resumes, the on state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61(b), in conventional gaming machines, the time-saving feature ends when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, by the time-saving feature end setting process within the special chart display process. In the time-saving feature end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving feature and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the off data of the variable time-saving feature signal, etc. is set in the test signal output data area as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving feature and output to the test firing device.

For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time reduction state signal as a test signal turn off after the display of the stopped result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, but at this timing, the jackpot 2 signal and the variable time reduction state signal immediately turn on due to the support operation setting process, so they do not actually turn off (the on state essentially continues). Therefore, unlike this embodiment, in conventional gaming machines, it is unclear that the time reduction has ended, and the on state of the external information and test signal output is unclear when the time reduction is resumed.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, the details of the safety device related processing (step X114) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device related processing. The safety device related processing is an in-area process and is executed as a part of the above-mentioned in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the in-area work area (step X601). If the safety device in operation flag = 1, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation. If the safety device is in operation (step X601; Y), the safety device-related processing is terminated.

When the safety device is not in operation (step X601; N), the game control device 100 loads the safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area (step X602), and determines whether the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (step X603). When the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (step X603; Y), there is no change in the safety device operation information, so the game control device proceeds to processing of step X609 without setting (sending) a performance command.

When the safety device activation information is not a value in the old activation information area (step X603; N), the game control device 100 sets a safety device activation-related command table that associates the safety device activation information with a command so that a presentation command can be set (sent) since there is a change in the safety device activation information (step X604), and acquires a command (ACTION section) corresponding to the safety device activation information (step X605). Then, it is determined whether or not there is no command definition (step X606). Since a command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (there is no command) in the safety device activation-related command table, it can be determined that there is no command definition when the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0). When there is no command definition (step X606; Y), the presentation command is not set (sent), and the process proceeds to step X609.

If a command definition exists (step X606; N), the game control device 100 prepares a safety device activation related command (MODE section) as a presentation command (step X607). If the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), it can be determined that a command definition exists. Then, a presentation command setting process is executed to set (send) the presentation command (step X608). Note that the presentation command is composed of a MODE section and an ACTION section. Note that a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) may be defined in the safety device activation related command table, and the judgment of step X606 may be omitted, so that a safety device activation related command can be set (sent) even for safety device non-activation information (value 0).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (step X609). If the safety device operation information is not safety device operation information (value 3) (step X609; N), the safety device-related processing ends. On the other hand, if the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (step X609; Y), the safety device operation flag area is saved with "1" indicating that the safety device is operating as the safety device operation flag (step X610), and the safety device-related processing ends. Note that if the safety device operation information (value 3) was saved in step X744 (described below) in the previous timer interrupt processing, the result of step X609 will be "Y" in the next timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), a safety device activation-related command is sent to the performance control device 300 with the safety device activation information included in part (ACTION section). When the ACTION section is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command becomes an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, or an activated command corresponding to the activated state, respectively.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning display 511 (e.g., the text "Playing will end soon") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play may be stopped, encouraging the player to end the game and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. It also provides a shock to anyone cheating, encouraging them to stop cheating.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning display 512 (for example, the text "Play will end after the win") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. Therefore, the player can be notified in advance that play will be stopped after a small win or a big win, and the player can be warned that he or she will suffer a disadvantage, such as the end of a winning streak. Note that a winning streak refers to, for example, a jackpot state and a specific game state continuing without going through normal mode (or normal game state). The activation warning state can also surprise someone who is cheating, encouraging them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operating command, the performance control device 300 can display an operating display 513 (e.g., the text "Playing Stopped") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an operating state (operating state). This can prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10, and can also stop any cheating that may be occurring.

Note that if the safety device operation information does not change and remains at 0, 1, 2, or 3 (no change from 0 to 0, 1 to 1, 2 to 2, or 3 to 3), the safety device operation-related command is not sent to the performance control device 300. Even if the safety device counter value becomes less than 190,000 after being between 190,000 and 194,999 and the safety device operation information changes from 1 to 0 (change from 1 to 0), the safety device operation-related command is not sent without a command definition. Note that changes in the safety device operation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1 and 3 to 2) are excluded by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device operation monitoring process described below.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (when it changes from 0 to 1), an operation notice command among the safety device operation related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device operation information changes from 1 to 2 (when it changes from 1 to 2), an operation warning command among the safety device operation related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device operation information changes from 2 to 3 (when it changes from 2 to 3), an operation command among the safety device operation related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. Note that when the safety device operation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step X603 becomes "Y" only once immediately after the change, and the operation command is sent through steps X604 to X610, and the safety device operation flag becomes 1, so the safety device is in operation (step X601; Y), and in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, steps X604 to X610 are not passed through and the safety device operation related command is not sent.

Note that the safety device activation information does not change directly from 1 to 3 (the change from 1 to 3 itself) by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below, but the safety device activation information can change instantly from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not cause an activation warning state as described below). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the safety device counter value reaching 195,000 when there is neither a big win nor a small win, and transitioning from an activation notice state to an activated state. Then, in response to the transition of the safety device from an activation notice state to an activated state, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation related command (steps X605, X607).

[Outside area integration processing]
Next, the details of the outside area integration process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the outside area integration process. The outside area integration process is an outside area process and is executed as a part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (step X701), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (step X702). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (step X703). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a performance display device control process is executed (step X704) to perform display control of the performance display device 152, etc. Next, a ball difference confirmation process (step X705) is executed to update the difference in ball number (safety device counter value) and set safety device operation information corresponding to the difference in ball number (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device operation monitoring process is executed to monitor the operation of the safety device (step X706).

Then, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (step X707), loads from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (step X708), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control process]
Next, the performance display device control process (step X704) in the outside area integration process (FIG. 63) will be described in detail. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the performance display device control process. The performance display device control process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first performs a validity determination to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including setting the initial value) (step X711). The processing of step X711 is the same as the processing of step X84 in FIG. 10.

In addition, since a validity check is performed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, and abnormal performance display (display of abnormal base values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized in order to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area and the in-area stack area.

Then, the game control device 100 executes an initial display timer update process (step X712). In the initial display timer update process, the timer is updated to perform full blinking control (initial display control) in which all LEDs of the display units of each digit of the performance display device 152 blink for approximately 5 seconds when the performance display starts (after the power is turned on).

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port that is the subject of the base value calculation to the performance display work area (step X713). The switch rising edge information is acquired in the input process and stored in the in-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (step X103). As described above, in this embodiment, the input ports that are the subject of the base value calculation (input ports to be monitored) are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (Figure 10).

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls does not directly change, and the rising edge information (bits) of switches that are not subject to the calculation of the base value are copied in a cleared state (masked). For example, information on the gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72a, remaining ball outlet switch 73, etc. is copied in a cleared state. This makes it possible to omit processing related to these switches (at least the clearing processing of step X91) in the performance display editing process.

If the normal number of out balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning port switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72a, or remaining ball discharge port switch 73, it would overlap with the out ball detection switch 74, which detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32, and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value. If the normal number of prize balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning port switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72a, or remaining ball discharge port switch 73, which overlap with the winning port switches and allow game balls to pass through, it would overlap with the winning port switches and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a performance display device display process (step X714). In the performance display device display process, segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 152 is set according to the type of display period and various other conditions. For example, a real-time value display period BL, a one-time-ago display period B1, a two-time-ago display period B2, and a three-time-ago display period B3 may be provided as display periods, and in each display period, segment output data corresponding to the real-time value during measurement of the base value, and the base value measured in the one-time-ago tally interval, the two-time-ago tally interval, and the three-time-ago tally interval may be set.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period and determines whether it is time to switch the display period (step X715). If it is time to switch the display period (step X715; Y), it executes the display period switching setting (step X716) and ends the performance display device control process. If it is not time to switch the display period (step X715; N), the game control device 100 does not execute the display period switching setting and ends the performance display device control process.

When switching the display period, the display period information is switched as follows: BL → B1 → B2 → B3 → BL → .... Also, the initial value of the timer for switching the period is set (for example, an initial value equivalent to a predetermined period of 5 seconds).

[Differential ball confirmation process]
Next, the details of the ball difference confirmation process (step X705) in the outside area integration process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ball difference confirmation process. The ball difference confirmation process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside area program. In the ball difference confirmation process, the safety device counter value (ball difference number + 100,000) indicating the number of ball difference is updated, and the safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device operation flag in the safety device operation flag area included in the in-area work area (step X721). If the safety device is in operation (step X721; Y), the ball difference confirmation process is immediately terminated, and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated. In this embodiment, the outside area integration process program (program related to the safety device) included in the outside area program is configured not to be executed during game stop, and when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, the outside area integration process including the ball difference confirmation process is not executed (step X120; Y), so the process of step X721 may not be performed. In addition, if the process of step X721 is not performed, the safety device operation flag area is read and written by the in-area program and becomes an area that is not read by the outside area program (an area that is not accessed).

When the safety device is not in operation (step X721; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the old operation information in the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≧ 2) (step X722). When the old operation information is 2 or more (step X722; Y), the difference ball confirmation process is terminated and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated.

When the old operation information is less than 2 (step X722; N), the game control device 100 judges whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (work area within the area) related to the fourth input port 126 (step X723). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (step X723; Y), it judges whether the safety device counter value is 0 (step X724). When the safety device counter value is not 0 (step X724; N), the safety device counter value, which is the value of the safety device counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (step X725). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of discharged balls by 1, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in the number of balls + 100,000) are updated by decreasing by 1. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the work area within the area (step X726).

If there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (step X723; N), or if the safety device counter value is 0 (step X724; Y), the game control device 100 maintains the safety device counter value without updating it by -1 and loads the number of acquired game balls (step X726).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety counter value of the safety counter area included in the outside work area (step X727) and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety counter value (step X728). The number of acquired game balls is the number of prize balls acquired (total) within one interruption, i.e., the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, so in step X728, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) and therefore the safety counter value (= difference in the number of balls + 100,000) are updated by increasing the number of acquired game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the safety counter value is equal to or greater than the counter reference value (195000) (whether the safety counter is ≧195000) (step X729). If the safety counter value is equal to or greater than the counter reference value (195000) (step X729; Y), the upper limit value (195000) is set to the safety counter value so as to return the safety counter value to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195000) (step X730), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety counter area as the value after the addition (step X731). Note that the safety counter value may exceed the upper limit value in step X728 and become 195000 + α. Here, α is less than the maximum value of the number of winning game balls (acquired within one interruption), and is smaller than the total number of winning balls when all winning port switches are input simultaneously.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195,000) (step X729; N), there is no need to limit it to the upper limit value, so the value after the addition process in step X728 is saved as is in the safety device counter area (step X731). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after the addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to an upper limit of 19,500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or bits) becomes clear, which is convenient for developing game control programs.

Next, the game control device 100 sets an operation information number (here, 0 to 2) that corresponds to the safety device counter value (step X732). Corresponding to safety device counter values of 0 to 189999, safety device counter values of 190000 to 194999, and safety device counter value of 195000, respectively, the operation information number is set to "0", indicating an unactivated state (normal state) of the safety device, "1", indicating an activation notice state, or "2", indicating an activation warning state. Note that the operation information number is not set to "3", indicating an activation state in which the safety device is activated.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old operation information area (step X733). Then, it is determined whether the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information = 2 and operation information number = 1) (step X734). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (step X734; Y), the safety device operation information "2" (loaded value) is maintained without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area, and the difference ball confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device operation information from changing from "2" to "1" (prevention of change from 2 to 1). Then, since the old operation information is 2 (step X722; Y), the difference ball confirmation process after the next timer interrupt is immediately terminated, the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated, and the safety device operation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (step X734; N, if the old operation information ≠ 2 or the operation information number ≠ 1), the game control device 100 saves the operation information number in the safety device operation information area and updates the safety device operation information area (step X735). After that, the difference ball confirmation process is terminated. Note that even if "2" indicating an operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if it is neither a big win nor a small win, "3" indicating the operation state of the safety device is instantly saved in the safety device operation information area in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process, and an operation warning state does not occur.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device operation information is set to "0" (safety device non-operation information) indicating the safety device is not activated (normal state), "1" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an activation warning state, or "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an activation warning state, corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 0 to 189,999, 190,000 to 194,999, and 195,000.

The change pattern (including the maintenance pattern) from the old safety device operation information (old operation information in step X733) to the new information after the update (step X735) will be one of 0 → 0, 0 → 1, 1 → 0, 1 → 1, 1 → 2, and 2 → 2, and as mentioned above, the change from 2 to 1 is prevented (step X734).

The game control device 100 may transmit a ball difference command indicating the updated safety device counter value (step X731) or a ball difference command indicating the updated number of balls difference (= safety device counter value - 100,000) to the performance control device 300 (sub-board), and the performance control device 300 may display the safety device counter value or the number of balls difference on the display device 41, etc. In that case, in the ball difference confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (step X722), the safety device counter value is updated, and the processes of steps X729 and X730 are omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value of 19,500. However, in response to a safety device counter value of 195,000 or more, the safety device operation information is set to "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state.

The above describes the difference ball confirmation process. Step X726 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a first counting means capable of counting the payout number, which is the number of game media paid out or the number of game media decided to be paid out. Steps X723 to X725 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of game media used (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls discharged). Step X728 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., safety device counter value or difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device operation monitoring process]
Next, the details of the safety device operation monitoring process (step X706) in the outside area integration process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device operation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an outside area process and is executed as a part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device activation information is 2 or more (safety device activation information ≧2) (step X741). If the safety device activation information is 2 or more (step X741; Y), that is, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) or the safety device activation information (value 3) is set, it determines whether a big win or a small win is occurring (step X742). Here, whether a big win or a small win is occurring can be determined based on, for example, the game processing number (special game processing number, accessory game processing number). The game processing number is stored in the game processing number area (special game processing number area, accessory game processing number area) of the work area within the area.

For example, if the game processing number of the big win fanfare is the game processing number of the big win ending, it can be determined that a big win is occurring. In this embodiment, if the accessory game processing number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that a big win is occurring. Also, for example, if the game processing number of the small win start (or small win fanfare (only if present)) is the game processing number of the small win remaining ball processing (or small win ending (only if present)), it can be determined that a small win is occurring. In this embodiment, if the special game processing number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that a small win is occurring. It may be determined that a small win is occurring from the time when the small win pattern is derived, or that a big win is occurring from the time when the big win pattern is derived. In the case where a big win occurs due to a V winning during a small win, it may be determined that a big win is occurring from the time when the V win is achieved.

When the game control device 100 is not in a small win or a big win (step X742; N), it loads the current safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old activation information area (step X743). Then, it saves the safety device activation information (value 3) in the safety device activation information area and updates the safety device activation information area (step X744).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" which is less than 2 (step X741; N), or if a big win or small win is occurring (step X742; Y), the safety device activation monitoring process is immediately terminated, and essentially nothing is done in the safety device activation monitoring process.

As described above, in an operation warning state (condition (1) is met and condition (2) is not met) in which the safety device is set and the safety device is activated, if the big win or small win ends and the game is no longer a small win or a big win (if condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to safety device activation information (value 3) (safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3) (step X744). This sets the safety device activation flag to "1" (step X610 of safety device-related processing), and the safety device is activated in an operating state (stop state), that is, a play stop state (unplayable state, play prohibited state) in which the special chart change display game, the normal chart change display game, and round play cannot be played as games.

By activating the safety device and preventing play, it is possible to take appropriate measures against fraud when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it may also be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Even if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (steps X732 and X735 of the difference ball confirmation process), if it is neither a big win nor a small win (step X742; N), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (step X744). That is, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the performance control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten and erased with the safety device activation information (value 3). Therefore, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 when it is neither a big win nor a small win, an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device does not occur, and the safety device is activated immediately and a game stop state (unplayable state, game prohibited state) occurs. As mentioned above, this corresponds to the safety device operation information changing instantly from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not result in an operation warning state), but in response to the transition from an operation warning state, which warns of the safety device's operation, to an operation state, in which the safety device is in operation, an operation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device operation-related command (steps X605, X607).

In addition, if the safety device is activated (value 3) and the safety device has already been activated to stop play, the outside area integration process is not executed (step X120; Y), so the safety device activation information is maintained as the safety device activated information (value 3) and the game stop state continues.

In this embodiment, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set during a small win, whether before or after a V win, after the big win due to the V win ends, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set in step X744 and the game is stopped (a big win occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before the V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends and the game is stopped (a big win does not occur), and if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after the V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) may be set after the big win due to the V win ends and the game is stopped (a big win occurs). As yet another example, even if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before or after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) may be set immediately after the end of the small win, causing the game to stop (a big win will not occur).

[Control of the production control device]
The control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program will be described below.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, a detailed description will be given of the main processing executed by the performance control device 300. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

When the main process starts, the performance control device 300 first prohibits interrupts (step S1). Next, it executes initial settings for the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (steps S2 and S3), and then permits interrupts (step S4). When interrupts are permitted, it becomes possible to execute command reception interrupt processing for receiving commands sent from the game control device 100.

Next, the performance control device 300 allows the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (step S5), and sets the random number seed used to generate random numbers (step S6). Then, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S7).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (step S8). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (step S2) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Then, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (step S9).

In the RTC read process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process moves to step S9. The RTC read process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the performance control device 300 (i.e., when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC read process may be changed and executed, for example, between step S3 and step S4). The performance control device 300 may set a time timer (timekeeping means) that keeps time in a timer area in the RAM, and adjust the time timer (timekeeping means) to match the time of the RTC 338 when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the time information is read from the RTC 338 only once when the power is turned on. The performance control device 300 may then execute various processes using the time timer. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance button input process (step S10) that detects the operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (signal of the performance button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) and changes the performance content (settings) according to the detected signal. Then, it executes a hall/player setting mode process (step S11) that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and LCD (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game arcade (game facility) or the player. In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described below.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance point control process that adds or clears performance points (step S12). In the performance point control process, performance points are added by executing a performance or operation that is eligible for adding performance points, and when the game ends or is stopped (when the game is stopped), information including performance point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a two-dimensional code, a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the performance control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 during hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when an operating command is received).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as performance random numbers (step S13), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process (step S14). Details of the received command check process will be described later in FIG. 68.

Then, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process to edit and control the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (step S15), and executes a power saving control process to control the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while it is waiting for customers (step S16).

The performance control device 300 then executes a performance display editing process (step S17) in which various data is updated according to the content to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 is set in the display frame buffer. If the drawing data set at this time is such that the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec), the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problems. Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (step S18).

The performance control device 300 then determines whether it is frame switching timing (step S19). If it is not frame switching timing (step S19; N), the process of step S19 is repeated until it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing (step S19; Y), an instruction is given to the display device 41 to draw the screen (step S20). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, frames are switched when a periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 seconds (1/2 the frame period). Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased even further.

The performance control device 300 also executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b (step S21).

The performance control device 300 also executes a decoration control process to control the decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) consisting of LEDs and the like (step S22). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of the decoration devices such as LEDs is executed.

The performance control device 300 also executes a movable body control process that controls performance devices (board performance device 44) such as motor-driven props that are driven by motors and solenoids (step S23). In the movable body control process, for example, a prop operation performance that drives a motor is set.

Then, when the performance control device 300 finishes the processing of step S23 described above, it returns to the processing of step S8. Thereafter, it repeats the processing of steps S8 to S23.

[Received command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step S14) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of received commands to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (step S101). It then determines whether the number of received commands is not 0 (step S102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if no commands have been received from the game control device 100 (step S102; N), there are no commands to analyze, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, i.e., if a command has been received from the game control device 100 (step S102; Y), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (step S103), and then copies the contents of the received command buffer in RAM to a command area for analysis (step S104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (step S105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read index 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether copying of the number of commands received and loaded in the processing of step S101 has been completed (step S106), and if copying has not been completed (step S106; N), it repeats the processing of steps S104 to S106.

When the performance control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed in a separate command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing free space in the received command buffer without directly performing analysis, it is possible to prepare for the reception of a large number of commands.

Next, when the copying is complete (step S106; Y), the performance control device 300 loads the received command contents in the command area for analysis (step S107) and executes a received command analysis process to analyze the contents (step S108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 69. The address of the command area for analysis is also updated (step S109). After that, it is determined whether or not analysis of the number of commands received that were loaded in the process of step S101 has been completed (step S110), and if analysis has not been completed (step S110; N), the processes of steps S107 to S110 are repeated. If analysis has been completed (step S110; Y), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (step S108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 68) will be described with reference to Fig. 69. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first separates the upper bytes of the received command into a MODE section and the lower bytes into an ACTION section (ACT section) (step S121). The command sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually sent consecutively starting from the MODE section, which indicates the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are composed of the MODE section and then the ACTION section, in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section is within the normal range (step S122). That is, it judges whether the MODE section indicating the type of command is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (step S122; Y), it judges whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (step S123). That is, it judges whether the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.) is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (step S123; Y), it further judges whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (step S124). That is, it judges whether the value of the ACTION section is a possible value for the type of command specified by the MODE section. If it is a correct combination (step S124; Y), it executes command processing according to the type of command in the processing from step S125 onwards.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the change command (step S125). Note that a change command is a command that instructs the change pattern of the decorative special pattern, and an example of such a command is a change command. Then, if the MODE section represents a change command (step S125; Y), the change command process is executed (step S126), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (step S125; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a win command (step S127). A win command is a command that commands operations related to the performance during a big win or small win (such as displaying a fanfare screen or round screen), such as a fanfare command for commanding a fanfare screen, a round command for commanding a round screen, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, and an ending command for commanding an ending screen. Then, if the MODE section represents a win command (step S127; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a win command process (step S128) and ends the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (step S127; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a symbol-based command (step S129). Symbol-based commands include, for example, the decorative special symbol 1 command and the decorative special symbol 2 command that correspond to the stopping symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (step S129; Y), it executes symbol-based command processing (step S130) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a pattern command (step S129; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a one-shot command (step S131). If the MODE section represents a one-shot command (step S131; Y), the performance control device 300 executes one-shot command processing (step S132) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (step S131; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead pattern command (step S133). A look-ahead pattern command is, for example, a look-ahead stop pattern command. Then, if the MODE section represents a look-ahead pattern command (step S133; Y), it executes look-ahead pattern command processing (step S134) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead pattern command (step S133; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (step S135). An example of a look-ahead variation command is a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, if the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (step S135; Y), the performance control device 300 executes look-ahead variation command processing (step S136) and ends the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (step S135; N), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), and so ends the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (step S122; N), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (step S123; N), or if the ACTION section is not a correct combination with the MODE section (step S124; N), the performance control device 300 ends the received command analysis process.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command processing (step S132) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-shot command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (step S141). If the MODE section represents a model designation command (step S141; Y), the device executes a model setting process to set the type of gaming machine (step S142), and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (step S141; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (step S143). If the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (step S143; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a RAM initialization setting process that notifies the user of RAM initialization, etc. (step S144), and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (step S143; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (step S145). For example, power outage recovery commands include a power outage recovery command and a recovery screen command. Then, if the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (step S145; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a power outage recovery setting process (step S146) and ends the one-off command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a power outage recovery command (step S145; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (step S147). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (step S147; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo setting process (step S148) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command (step S147; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (step S149). If the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (step S149; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a special chart 1 reserved information setting process (step S150) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (step S149; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (step S151). If the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (step S151; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a special chart 2 reserved information setting process (step S152) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (step S151; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (step S153). If the MODE section represents a probability information command (step S153; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a probability information setting process (step S154) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (step S153; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents an error/fraud command (step S155). In addition, examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command, a fraud release command, a status off command, a status on command, a magnet fraud notification command (magnetic error command), and a board radio wave fraud notification command (board radio wave error command). The fraud occurrence command includes a command indicating the occurrence of a fraudulent win based on the signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a and 39a. The fraud release command is a command indicating the release of the fraud. In the winning port switch/status monitoring process (step X108), the occurrence of a fraudulent win and the release of the fraud are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraud release command can be transmitted. Status ON commands include commands indicating the occurrence of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), an overflow switch signal (overflow error), an abnormal payout status signal (abnormal payout error), a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error), and a signal from the main frame open detection switch 64 (front frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame open error). Status OFF commands indicate the absence of errors. If there is a detection from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (magnet illegal), a magnet illegal notification command is sent in the magnet illegal monitoring process (step X115). If there is a detection from the board radio wave sensor 62 (radio wave illegal), a board radio wave illegal notification command is sent in the radio wave illegal monitoring process (step X116).

If the MODE section indicates an error/fraud command (step S155; Y), an error/fraud setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or fraud (step S156), and the single-shot command process is terminated. The error/fraud setting process may, for example, generate an error or fraud notification sound, cause the LEDs for presentation provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, to light up in a predetermined manner, or set the display device 41, etc. to display an error.

If the MODE section does not indicate an error/incorrect command (step S155; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section indicates a command for switching performance modes (set during processing while the special chart is displayed, etc.) (step S157). If the MODE section indicates a command for switching performance modes (step S157; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a performance mode switching setting process (step S158) and ends the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the presentation mode (step S157; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents an out ball count command indicating the number of out balls (step S159). Then, if the MODE section represents an out ball count command (step S159; Y), it executes processing at the time of receiving the out ball count (step S160) and ends the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a ball count command (step S159; N), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a count command (big prize opening count command) (step S161). If the MODE section represents a big prize opening switch count command (step S161; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a count information setting process (step S162) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command (step S161; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (step S163). The setting value information command is included in the command sent when power is restored in step X49 of FIG. 6 and the command sent when RAM is initialized in the processing of step X47. If the MODE section represents a setting value information command (step S163; Y), processing is executed when the setting value is received (step S164), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the processing when the setting value is received, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage section such as a RAM, and the necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (step S163; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (step S165). An example of a setting change command is a probability setting change command (step X33). If the MODE section represents a setting change command (step S165; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a setting change information setting process (step S166) and terminates the single-shot command processing. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a probability setting change command is received, the setting change information setting process displays a setting change in progress display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (step S165; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (step S167). An example of a setting confirmation command is a probability setting confirmation command (step X36). If the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (step S167; Y), the performance control device 300 executes a setting confirmation information setting process (step S168) and terminates the single-shot command processing. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a probability setting confirmation command is received, the setting confirmation information setting process displays a setting confirmation display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

When the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command (step S167; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (step S169). An example of a safety device-related command is a safety device activation-related command (step X607). When a difference ball command including difference ball information such as a safety device counter value and difference ball number is sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, this difference ball command may be included in the safety device-related command. Then, when the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (step S169; Y), the safety device-related processing related to the safety device is executed (step S170), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the safety device-related processing, the contents of the safety device-related command are stored, and the processing corresponding to the command is executed.

In the safety device processing, the information included in the safety device related command can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the command. For example, when a safety device activation related command is received as a safety device related command, the display device 41 displays safety device related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513) corresponding to the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3)) included in the ACTION section of the safety device activation related command. Also, for example, when a difference ball command is received as a safety device related command, the difference ball number is displayed on the display device 41.

The difference in the number of balls (= safety device counter value -100,000) may be displayed on the display device 41 in the entire range of values (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) in response to the received difference in ball command, or only a specified range of values (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the activation notice state) may be displayed. In addition, the difference in the number of balls itself may be displayed, or the difference in the number of balls may be displayed indirectly in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stop).

The difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the difference in the number of balls, which changes in units of 1. For example, the difference in the number of balls indicated by the difference ball command can change by 1, between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, just like the actual difference in the number of balls. The difference ball command may be transmitted each time the safety device counter value and thus the difference in the number of balls are updated (step X731).

The difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the difference ball number that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can change in units of 1000, and may be 0 (= actual difference ball number 0-999), 1000 (= actual difference ball number 1000-1999), 2000 (= actual difference ball number 2000-2999), ..., 100,000 (= actual difference ball number 100,000). In this case, in order to reduce the chance of sending the difference ball command, the difference ball command may be sent each time the safety device counter value and therefore the difference ball number are updated in units of 1000 (step X731). The difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command may also have a negative value.

If the MODE unit does not represent a safety device-related command (step S169; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a pattern stop command (step S171). Pattern stop commands include, for example, a pattern stop command for special pattern 1 (decorative special pattern 1 stop command) and a pattern stop command for special pattern 2 (decorative special pattern 2 stop command). If the MODE unit represents a pattern stop command (step S171; Y), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the command in the MODE unit is a normal command (step S172).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (step S172; Y), the presentation control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (step S173), sets the game status flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (step S174), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of step S174, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to a flag of "changing", "big hit", or "small hit".

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a command to stop the pattern (step S171; N), or if the command in the MODE section is not normal (step S172; N), the performance control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the performance control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG. 70 in single-shot command processing. For example, the performance control device 300 may receive a time-saving change count command, a performance rotation count command, a play instruction notification command (left-hand hit instruction notification command, right-hand hit instruction notification command), etc. from the game control device 100 and perform processing corresponding to the command. The performance control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of changes in the time-saving state from the time-saving change count command (time-saving change count), etc., and can obtain the remaining number of rotations for each performance mode from the performance rotation count command, etc., and can set the performance based on the remaining number of changes in the time-saving state and the remaining number of rotations for each performance mode. The performance control device 300 can display (notify) a play instruction display (left-hand hit instruction display or right-hand hit instruction display) that instructs (suggests) the play instruction on the display device 41, etc., in response to a play instruction notification command (left-hand hit instruction notification command or right-hand hit instruction notification command).

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading symbol command processing (step S134) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reservation number command is a decorative special chart 1 reservation number command (step S181). If the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (step S181; Y), it saves a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reserved number (step S182).

If the latest reserved information is not information on reserved special chart 1 (step S181; N), i.e., if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (step S183).

After steps S182 and S183, the performance control device 300 sets a look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (step S184). This is because the look-ahead pattern system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command are a set, so the look-ahead fluctuation system command is sent from the game control device 100 following the look-ahead pattern system command. Then, the look-ahead pattern system command processing ends.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead variable command processing (step S136) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) (step S191). If the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation system command waiting to receive flag (step S194) is set, it can be determined that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. If it is not waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (step S191; N), it ends the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. If it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (step S191; Y), it clears the look-ahead fluctuation system command waiting to receive flag (step S192).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the reserved number of the pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) of the latest reserved information (step S193), and acquires a sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead fluctuation command (step S194). Next, it sets a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table (step S195), and acquires a sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation command (step S196).

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-intra look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) are both other than 0 (step S197). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If the converted MODE and ACT sections are both other than 0 (step S197; Y), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE and ACT sections is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special chart 1 look-ahead variable command area or special chart 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and number of pending items (step S198). Then, a look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (step S199) to judge whether the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is normal (step S200).

The time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved items start the variable display game. If there are no other reserved items when the reserved items start the variable display game, the first half fluctuation will be longer, and if new reserved items are generated and the number of reserved items is large, the first half fluctuation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted to a sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reserved positions, the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the ACT section of the sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command does not depend on the number of reserved positions. However, since there are different types of reaches of the same system, if the performance control device 300 were to use the ACT section (value of the latter half of the fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation command as is without converting it, the number would increase and checking would become difficult. For example, even with normal reaches, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT section indicating a reach of the same system to the same sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section, the number can be reduced, and the burden of checking processes such as the look-ahead command consistency check process can be reduced.

Next, if at least one of the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-intra look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) is 0 (step S197; N), or if the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is not normal (step S200; N), the performance control device 300 determines that there is an abnormality in the converted command and terminates the look-ahead variable command processing.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (step S200; Y), the performance control device 300 loads the pending information to be read ahead (latest pending information) from the look-ahead variable command area (step S201), and executes a look-ahead lottery process for the latest pending look-ahead performance (step S202). Examples of look-ahead performance include continuous preview performance (including chance eye look-ahead performance), look-ahead zone performance, and hold change notice. Next, it is determined whether or not the latest pending look-ahead performance (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (step S203). If the latest pending look-ahead performance occurs (step S203; Y), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead performance is set (step S204).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the pre-reading performance (reserved change notice, etc.) to be generated is an immediate start performance (step S205). If the pre-reading performance to be generated is an immediate start performance (step S205; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading performance is set (step S206). If the pre-reading performance to be generated is not an immediate start performance (step S205; N), a display corresponding to the pre-reading performance at the time of the reserve shift (when the reserve display moves, when the number of reserves decreases) is set and saved (step S207). Then, the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. Note that the pre-reading performance is a performance that notifies the jackpot expectation (expectation of a special result) by notifying information suggesting the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops, but information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6) may be notified. In other words, the performance control device 300 can perform a pre-reading performance so that the reserve display (icon) of the pre-reading target changes based on the jackpot expectation and the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the most recently reserved look-ahead performance does not occur (step S203; N), the performance control device 300 ends the look-ahead change command processing.

[Pattern Command Processing]
Next, the details of the symbol-related command processing (step S130) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol-related command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 sets the special symbol type corresponding to the MODE section of the received symbol command (decorative special symbol 1 command or decorative special symbol 2 command) (step S211). The special symbol type is special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE section and ACTION section (ACT section) of the symbol command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (step S212). Here, since the symbol distribution ratio differs between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, a table is used to set the symbol type for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol types correspond to the losing symbol, the jackpot symbol A of special symbol 1, the jackpot symbols B to F of special symbol 2, the jackpot symbol G in the remaining reserved (special symbol 2 reserved), the time-saving symbol (support hit symbol), etc.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (step S126) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 judges whether the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the received fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) is undetermined (step S221). If the special symbol type is undetermined (step S221; Y), the fluctuation system command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step S221; N), the combination of the received fluctuation system command and pattern command is checked (step S222), and it is judged whether the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (step S223). Here, inconsistency means a contradiction in the performance, such as when a fluctuation system command for a losing symbol is received while a pattern command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (step S223; Y), the fluctuation system command processing is terminated.

If the fluctuation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (step S223; N), the performance control device 300 determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (step S224), and executes a variable performance setting process to set the variable performance that is a variable performance during fluctuation (step S225). Note that there are multiple performances for the same fluctuation command. Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special pattern fluctuation in progress" (step S226), and if the number of pre-reading performances such as consecutive performances is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S227).

[Variable performance setting process]
Next, the details of the variable performance setting process (step S225) in the variable command process (FIG. 74) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (step S231). If the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach fluctuation (step S231; Y), it sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special chart type, performance mode, and setting information (setting value) (step S232), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) and the reserved number of special chart type (step S233). In the case of a non-reach fluctuation, the more reserved number is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, so the address of the table corresponding to the reserved number is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a non-reach variation (step S231; N), i.e., if it is a reach variation, the performance control device 300 sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special chart type, performance mode, design type, and setting information (setting value) (step S234), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type (step S235).

After steps S233 and S235, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the notices that will appear during the first half of the fluctuation (before the reach) (step S236). Next, it sets a second half notice distribution group address table that corresponds to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (step S237), obtains the address of the second half notice distribution group table that corresponds to the ACT part of the fluctuation system command (step S238), and performs a lottery for the notices that will appear during the second half of the fluctuation (during the reach) (step S239). After that, it determines the content of the fluctuation performance that corresponds to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) (step S240). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be determined from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (pre-notification performance) that corresponds to the result of the pre-notification lottery (step S241). After that, the stopping pattern of the decorative special chart variable display game is determined according to the variable performance such as the reach performance and the content of the pre-notification performance (step S242). Here, the decorative stopping pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattering pattern in the case of a losing pattern.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of the variable performance (step S243), and sets the display of the preview performance (step S244). Next, the display of the reserved reduction corresponding to the special chart type is set, and for example, a display of a decrease in the reserved display corresponding to the decorative special chart that is changing this time (display of a reserved shift) is set (step S245). Next, an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's audio, and a decoration number that determines the performance mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (step S246). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has multiple decorative light-emitting parts (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light-emitting mode (color and light-emitting timing of each LED, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

It is also possible to set the audio number and decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the performance content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, i.e., the light emission mode of the decorative light-emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern type (step S247), and sets the display of a fourth pattern change related to a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern, identification information) in addition to the aforementioned first to third special patterns that change on the display device 41 (step S248). The fourth pattern change may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the aforementioned lamp display device 75 provided outside the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (step S128) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 69) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section of the received winning command represents fanfare (step S251). If the MODE section of the winning command represents fanfare (step S251; Y), that is, if the winning command is a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, a fanfare performance setting process is executed to set a fanfare performance (step S252). In addition, in response to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, a hitting instruction (left hit instruction or right hit instruction) may be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big win. Next, the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare (step S253), and the winning command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the type of symbol determined from the symbol command (the special symbol command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent fanfare (step S251; N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (step S254). If the MODE section represents a round (step S254; Y), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small winning open command, the performance control device 300 executes a round performance setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (steps S255, S256), and ends the winning command process.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a round (step S254; N), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an interval (step S257). If the MODE section represents an interval (step S257; Y), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes an interval presentation setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (steps S258, S259), and ends the winning command process.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an interval (step S257; N), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an ending (step S260). If the MODE section represents an ending (step S260; Y), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set an ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (steps S261, S262), and ends the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an ending (step S260; N), the performance control device 300 ends the winning command processing without performing any processing.

[Safety device]
The following describes the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) of the performance-related devices (display state, light emission state, operation state, etc.) that correspond to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value). The performance-related devices are devices that can execute performances, and include, for example, the display device 41, decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, etc.) consisting of performance LEDs, and movable parts that can be operated (movable body, board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.).

[Aspects of Production-related Devices]
77 is a table showing the state of the performance device according to the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 77, the state of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (and thus the difference in the number of balls).

As explained in the safety device information initialization process (Figure 9), etc., when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189,999 (difference in number of balls is -100,000 to 89,999), the safety device is in a non-operated state (an activation notice state, an activation warning state, or a normal state where the safety device is not in an activated state). Also, when the safety device counter value is 190,000 to 194,999 (difference in number of balls is 90,000 to 94,999), the safety device is in an activation notice state that warns of the activation of the safety device. Also, when the safety device counter value is 195,000 (difference in number of balls is 95,000), the safety device is in an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device, or an activated state where the safety device is in operation (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is 195000 and a big win or a small win is occurring, the safety device goes into an activation warning state, and when the safety device counter value is 195000 and a big win or a small win is not occurring, the safety device goes into an activation state. Therefore, if the safety device goes into an activation state before a big win or a small win occurs, a game stop state (a game not possible state, a game prohibited state) occurs immediately after the safety device goes into an activation state, and an activation warning state does not occur.
On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 during a big win or a small win. Then, when the big win or small win ends and the big win or small win is no longer occurring, the safety device transitions from the activation warning state to an activated state (activated state).

When the safety counter value is 0 to 194999 (difference in number of balls is -100000 to 94999), i.e., when the safety is not activated or is in an activation warning state, the state of the gaming machine (game state) is in play or waiting for customers (waiting for customers state). Also, when the safety counter value is 195000 (difference in number of balls is 95000) and the safety is in an activation warning state, the gaming machine is in a small win or a big win, and when the safety counter value is 195000 (difference in number of balls is 95000) and the safety is in an activated state, the gaming machine is in a game stop state (unplayable state, game prohibited state). Note that the same game stop state can also occur when a strong error 2 occurs.

In the game stop state, the special chart variable display game, the normal chart variable display game, the round game (game during a big win or a small win), etc. cannot be executed as a game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (winning number counter update process), in the game stop state (step X351; Y), the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch is invalidated, and the winning port (winning) is invalidated. Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (output process), in the game stop state (step X203; Y), the operation of all solenoids is stopped, and the big winning port, the specific area 72, the normal variable winning device 37, etc. are closed and in the closed state, and in the game stop state (step X212; Y), the launch of the game ball from the ball launching device is stopped (prohibited), and the collective display device 50 is turned off.
In addition, in the game stop state, not only can the special chart change display game and the normal chart change display game not be continued, but also a new special chart change display game and a new normal chart change display game cannot be started. However, in the game stop state, the payout command transmission process (step X107) is not stopped, so the payout of the winning balls that occurred before the game stop state continues.
In addition, it is also possible to configure the device so that the release of the game balls is not stopped in at least one of the game stop states when the safety device is activated and when a strong error 2 occurs.

Also, as shown in FIG. 59 (external information editing process), when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (step X519; Y), a security signal is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer (step X522), and a game machine error state signal is output as a test signal to the test firing device (step X523). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the test signal (game machine error state signal) is not generated in at least one of the game stop state when the safety device is activated and the game stop state when strong error 2 occurs.

When the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 does not display any safety device-related display related to the safety device. However, as an exception, when the machine is waiting for customers, the specific model display 67 (e.g., the text "equipped with complete function") may be used to indicate that the machine is equipped with a safety device. This allows a player who sees the specific model display 67 to recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device activation warning state, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 511 (e.g., the text "Play ends soon") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). In order to effectively display the activation warning display 511, the display mode of the activation warning display 511 may be changed according to the game state, such as while waiting for customers or while a variable display is being performed (while a special chart variable display game is being executed). In the safety device system processing (step S170) of the single-shot system command processing (Figure 70), the performance control device 300 receives an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command at the start of the activation warning state, so that it is possible to display the activation warning display 511 on the display device 41.

In this way, by displaying the operation warning display 511, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the possibility that he or she will no longer be able to play, thereby urging the player to end the game and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. Also, by displaying the operation warning display 511, it is possible to surprise someone who is cheating, thereby urging them to stop cheating. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the display mode of the operation warning display 511 depending on the game status (e.g., waiting for customers, during a changing display), which makes it possible to provide an effective warning display.

In the safety device activation warning state, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 (e.g., the text "Play will end after winning") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). In the safety device processing (step S170) of the single-shot command processing (Figure 70), the performance control device 300 receives an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command at the start of the activation warning state, so that it is possible to display the activation warning display 512 on the display device 41.

When the safety device is in an operational state, i.e., when play is stopped, the display device 41 displays an operational display 513 (e.g., the text "play stopped") as a safety device-related display (or safety device operation information display). In the safety device processing (step S170) of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 70), the performance control device 300 receives an operational command corresponding to the operational state as a safety device operation-related command at the start of the operational state, so that it is possible to display the operational display 513 on the display device 41.
In addition, the performance control device 300 constitutes a display control means capable of displaying on the display device 41, etc. (display means) an operation notification display 511 that notifies the user of the operation of the safety device, an operation warning display 512 that warns of the operation of the safety device, and an operation in progress display 513 that shows that the safety device is currently in operation.

In addition, the display device 41 can display an error display when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated. For example, since payouts continue even in a game stopped state, a payout error may occur regarding the payout of game balls (game media), and the display device 41 can notify the occurrence of the payout error by displaying an error. Note that in a game stopped state when a strong error 2 has occurred, the display device 41 may be able to display an error display of the payout error so that hall staff and players are aware of the occurrence of a payout error, or the display device 41 may not be able to display an error display of the payout error (weak error) so as not to confuse it with a strong error 2.

In the game stop state, unlike the non-operation state, the operation notice state, and the operation warning state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all turned off). Note that in the game stop state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 may be turned on (all turned on).
In addition, when the game is stopped, the ball lending button 27a remains active, and when the player operates it to borrow a game ball, the game ball may be paid out from the payout device to the upper tray 21.

In addition, when the game is stopped, the performance control device 300 that has received an operation command turns off (all off) or lights up (all on) all performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the decoration devices (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). However, when an error occurs, some or all of the performance LEDs may be lit in red.
In addition, in the game stop state, the performance control device 300 may stop the sound output from the speakers 19a, 19b to make them silent, or may not execute the hall/player setting mode process (step S11) of the main process (FIG. 71), and may set the brightness of the performance LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b to the default brightness and volume by making them unadjustable. In addition, the performance control device 300 may return the movable role (movable body, board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.) to its initial position when the game stop state begins while the movable role is in operation.

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special game processing timer, the gimmick game processing timer, and the normal game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 may not be turned off and may continue to display as it did when the game stopped state. Furthermore, if the collective display device 50 is displaying a change at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after this change display ends. This makes it possible to prevent the change display on the collective display device 50 from suddenly ending. Also, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue to display.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (OFF) and then turned on (ON) again, the safety device counter area, the safety device operation information area, etc. are initialized by the safety device information initialization process (FIG. 9) (steps X74 to X76). In this case, the safety device operation information such as the safety device operation notice information (value 1), the safety device operation warning information (value 2), and the safety device operation information (value 3) are erased, so that the safety device-related displays (the operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, the operation display 513, etc.) on the display device 41 may be erased and hidden.
In addition, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (OFF) while the safety device is in operation and the power supply is turned on again (ON) with the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ON state, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 by the main process (FIG. 6) (step X45). Therefore, in this case, the safety device operation flag area is cleared to 0, and the gaming machine 10 returns from the game stop state to a playable state.

[Screen transition example 1]
78 and 79 are examples (example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order.
After the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is in a waiting state for customers, and the display device 41 displays a waiting screen as shown in Fig. 78(a). Here, the model name display 90 (for example, the characters "P Tora Tora Tora") is displayed on the display device 41. At this point, the game has not started, so the safety device counter value is the initial value (100,000). After that, when the operating handle 24 is rotated, a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device, and when the gaming ball enters the start winning hole 36 (first start winning hole) or the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning hole), a special chart variable display game is executed.

After that, in FIG. 78(b), the safety counter value has decreased from the initial value (100,000) to 99,920. Because the total number of winning balls does not increase significantly until a jackpot occurs, the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) tends to decrease by the number of discharged balls, and the safety counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. Note that when a difference ball command indicating the safety counter value or difference in number of balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the presentation control device 300 may display the safety counter value or difference in number of balls (safety counter value - initial value) on the display device 41.

Figure 78 (b) is the display screen during execution of the special chart 1 variable display game. A first decorative game display section 81 is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41, which displays the first decorative game of the decorative special chart variable display games. The first decorative game display section 81 displays the decorative special chart variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable display area, the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then displaying it in a stopped state.

A second decoration game display unit 82 is provided in a predetermined location (upper right in this embodiment) in the display area of the display device 41, which displays the second decoration game of the decoration special pattern variable display game. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display unit 82, like the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display unit 81, displays variable identification information in the left, middle, and right areas and then stops to display the result. The second decoration game display unit 82 is configured to display identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed in the first decoration game display unit 81.

In addition, at a specified location in the display area of the display device 41 (the bottom in this embodiment), there are provided waiting memory display units 83a, 83b which display a decorative special chart start memory display corresponding to the start memory, and an executing memory display unit 84 which displays information regarding the start memory corresponding to the special chart change display game currently being executed.
The first standby memory display section 83a provided to the right of the running memory display section 84 displays a decorative special symbol start memory display corresponding to the first start memory. The decorative special symbol start memory displays displayed on the first standby memory display section 83a correspond one-to-one with the first start memory, and are displayed in order of storage so that the decorative special symbol start memory display on the left end corresponds to the decorative special symbol start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored, and are shifted to the left each time one is consumed. Then, at the start of the special symbol 1 variable display game, the decorative special symbol start memory display on the left end of the first standby memory display section 83a is shifted to the running memory display section 84.

The second standby memory display section 83b, provided to the left of the running memory display section 84, displays a decorative special chart start memory display corresponding to the second start memory. The decorative special chart start memory displays displayed on the second standby memory display section 83b correspond one-to-one with the second start memories, and are displayed in order of storage so that the decorative special chart start memory display on the right end is the decorative special chart start memory display corresponding to the first stored second start memory, and shift to the right each time one is consumed. Then, at the start of the special chart 2 variable display game, the decorative special chart start memory display on the right end of the second standby memory display section 83b shifts to the running memory display section 84.

In addition, in the standby memory display units 83a, 83b, it is possible to suggest the results of the special chart change display game based on the start memory, the change pattern, and other predictive results by the display mode of the decorative special chart start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
In addition, the in-progress memory display unit 84 can suggest the results and change patterns of the special chart change display game currently being executed by the display mode of the in-progress memory display displayed on the in-progress memory display unit 84.

A first start memory number display section 85a that displays the first start memory number (special chart 1 reserved number) and a second start memory number display section 85b that displays the second start memory number (special chart 2 reserved number) are provided at a predetermined location in the display area of the display device 41 (the upper left in this embodiment).
In addition, a predetermined portion of the display area of the display device 41 (the upper right portion in this embodiment) is provided with a variation count display section 86 that displays the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed after power-on or after the end of a jackpot. Here, "2G" is displayed, indicating that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed since power-on is two. In addition, in the case of a machine type capable of generating a probability variation state, the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed since power-on or after the end of a jackpot, excluding the number of times in the probability variation state, may be displayed on the variation count display section 86 in order to make it easier to recognize that the ceiling number of times is approaching.

In addition, a state display unit 87 is provided at a predetermined location (upper left in this embodiment) in the display area of the display device 41 to display the state (whether the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game are running or stopped). The state display unit 87 is divided into left and right areas, and the state of the special chart 1 variable display game is displayed in the left area, and the state of the special chart 2 variable display game is displayed in the right area. Here, since the special chart 1 variable display game is running (changing) and the special chart 2 variable display game is stopped, the symbol "○" is displayed in the left area, and the symbol "×" is displayed in the right area. The symbol "○" may be displayed flashing to perform a fourth pattern change as the fourth special pattern (fourth pattern).
It is also possible to provide a display unit other than the display units 81 to 87 at a predetermined location in the display area of the display device 41. Specifically, for example, a mode display unit that displays the current rendering mode may be provided.

After that, many jackpots occur, and in Figure 78 (c), the safety device counter value reaches 189,993 (difference in number of balls = 89,993), approaching the warning start value of 190,000 (difference in number of balls = 90,000) at which the safety device activation warning state begins. Here, after the jackpot ends or the ceiling number of times is reached, the game enters a specific game state (time-saving state), and in response, a right-hit instruction display 91 is displayed to instruct the player to hit to the right.

78(d), the second start memory is increased by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) by hitting from the right, and the special chart 2 reserved number is "4" (the special chart 1 reserved number is "0"). Here, a prize ball is obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37, and the safety device counter value is 190009, which is greater than the notice start value 190000 (safety device counter value ≧ 190000), and correspondingly, the operation notice display 511 ("The game will end soon") that notices the operation of the safety device is displayed as a safety device related display.
The activation notice display 511 may be an expression other than "Ending soon." The display mode of the activation notice display 511 is not limited to a mode in which all of the information is displayed at once, and may be a mode in which the information is not displayed all at once (such as a scroll display). In the activation notice state, the activation of the safety device may be notified not only by the activation notice display 511 but also by a sound from the speakers 19a and 19b or by the illumination of an LED for effect, etc.

In this way, by warning the player of the upcoming activation of the safety device using the activation warning display 511 or the like and informing the player in advance of the possibility of a game stop state, the player can be urged to end the game, thereby preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. In addition, by warning the player of the upcoming activation of the safety device using the activation warning display 511 or the like, it is possible to surprise anyone who is cheating, thereby urging them to stop cheating.

In this embodiment, the activation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the other displays or other image objects from being reduced by the activation notice display 511. Here, the other displays and other image objects are displays on the display units 81 to 87, the right hit instruction display 91, character images (not shown), and the like.
The operation notice display 511 may be an animation display (a rocking display, a scrolling display, a blinking display, etc.). This increases the likelihood that the player will notice the operation notice display 511 even when the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to interfere with (not to overlap with) other displays or other image objects. Also, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation notice display 511), the operation notice display 511 may be displayed near a display that is likely to be noticed by the player (for example, the right hit instruction display 91).
In addition, when the operation warning display 511 is displayed so as to overlap with other displays or other image objects, the operation warning display 511 may be displayed on a layer closer to the player than the other displays and other image objects in order to make the operation warning display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation warning display 511).

After that, when the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a break, etc., the launch of the game balls ends. Then, as the second start memory is consumed, the number of reserved special figures 2 becomes "0" as shown in Fig. 78(e). Here, since the safety device counter value is 190055, which is greater than the notice start value 190000, the operation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") continues to be displayed.
After that, when the special chart 2 variable display game being executed in Fig. 78(e) is finished, as shown in Fig. 78(f), the identification information is stopped and displayed in the decorative game display sections 81 and 82, the execution memory display displayed in the execution memory display section 84 disappears, and both the left and right areas in the status display section 87 become "x". Here, since the safety device counter value remains at 190055, the display of the operation notice display 511 continues.

After that, the gaming machine 10 enters a waiting state, and the display device 41 displays a waiting screen as shown in Fig. 79(a). During the waiting state, the safety device counter value is maintained at 190055, and the operation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") continues to be displayed.
As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as while waiting for customers or while a variable display is being performed (while a special chart variable display game is being performed). For example, in this embodiment, the display size of the operation notice display 511 displayed while waiting for customers is made larger than the display size of the operation notice display 511 displayed while a variable display is being performed. This makes it possible to display the operation notice display 511 appropriately and effectively. In other words, in an operation notice state in which it is highly likely that the safety device will soon be activated and the game will be stopped, by prominently displaying the operation notice display 511 while waiting for customers, it is possible to effectively prevent new players from using the gaming machine 10.

Also, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 79 (a), the operation notice display 511 is displayed on a layer in front of the display on the customer waiting screen (here, the model name display 90 ("P Tora Tora Tora")). In this way, by displaying the operation notice display 511 large while waiting for customers, even if the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as to overlap with the display on the customer waiting screen (i.e., other displays or other image objects), it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the operation notice display 511 (becoming difficult to see as it is obscured by other displays or other image objects).
The display mode of the operation notice display 511 during waiting for passengers (the display mode that makes the operation notice display 511 stand out) is not limited to the mode of increasing the display size or the mode of displaying on a layer in front of other displays or other image objects, and may be, for example, an animation display (swaying display, scrolling display, blinking display, etc.). Also, it is possible to display the operation notice display 511 in a prominent manner by combining a plurality of these modes as in this embodiment, or it is possible to display the operation notice display 511 in a prominent manner by using any one of these modes.

Thereafter, when the player finishes his/her break and resumes playing, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 returns to the variable display mode, as shown in FIG. 79(b).
After that, many jackpots occur without going through normal mode due to consecutive wins, etc., and in Figure 79 (c), the safety device counter value reaches 194,500 (difference in number of balls = 94,500), approaching the counter reference value of 195,000 at which the safety device can begin to operate.
In addition, when the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the presentation control device 300 can determine whether or not the safety device counter value has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 194,500) that is greater than the notice start value 190,000 and slightly smaller than the counter reference value 195,000. Therefore, when the safety device counter value reaches this predetermined value, the presentation control device 300 may notify the player that the safety device is about to start operating by changing the display mode of the operation notice display 511 (for example, by blinking).

Also, as shown in FIG. 79(c), when the decorative special chart start memory display is displayed on the standby memory display units 83a and 83b (when there is an unconsumed start memory), the performance control device 300 may change the display mode of part or all of the decorative special chart start memory display displayed on the standby memory display units 83a and 83b (for example, by blinking) when the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 194,500), thereby notifying the player that the unconsumed start memory will be wasted due to the stop of play caused by the activation of the safety device.

Also, when the safety device counter value is a predetermined value (e.g., 194,500) or more, in order to prevent the player from getting excited, the performance control device 300 may prohibit the execution of a pre-reading performance such as a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special chart start memory display displayed on the standby memory display unit 83a, 83b according to the expectation degree of a small hit result or a big hit result, etc. On the other hand, even if the safety device counter value is a predetermined value (e.g., 194,500) or more, the execution of a notice performance regarding the currently running special chart change display game (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84 to suggest the expectation degree of the currently running special chart change display game to be a small hit result or a big hit result, etc.) may not be prohibited.
In addition, the timing for prohibiting the execution of a look-ahead effect (such as a hold change notice) may not be the timing when the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 194,500), but the timing when the activation notice state is reached (i.e., the timing when the safety device counter value reaches the notice start value).
In addition, if the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) and then turned on again (on) before the safety device is activated, the safety device activation information area is initialized by the safety device information initialization process (Figure 9) and the safety device activation notice information (value 1) is erased, so in this case, the activation notice display 511 will no longer be displayed.

After that, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 (difference in number of balls = difference in ball reference value of 95,000), and if there is neither a big win nor a small win, the safety device goes into an activated state (in operation), and the gaming machine 10 immediately goes into a game stop state. Then, when the safety device starts to be activated, the display device 41 first displays an activation movie 514, as shown in FIG. 79(d), to notify that the safety device is starting to be activated (the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value). In addition, a performance display 515 is also displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value.

After that, when the operation movie 514 ends, as shown in Fig. 79 (e), an operation display 513 ("playing stopped") is displayed as a safety device-related display to inform that the safety device is in operation. Here, a manufacturer name display 516 showing the manufacturer name of the gaming machine 10 and an explanation display 517 showing how to display the menu screen 93 are also displayed, and even after the operation movie 514 ends, the performance display 515 continues to be displayed.
In this embodiment, the display size of the operation indication 513 is made larger than the display size of the operation notice indication 511 (the operation notice indication 511 displayed during the varying display (see Figures 79(b) and (c))). This allows the operation indication 513 to be displayed appropriately and effectively, and effectively notifies the player that the safety device is in operation (in a game stopped state). In other words, by displaying the operation indication 513 in a large size, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10. Note that the display mode of the operation indication 513 (a display mode that makes the operation indication 513 stand out) is not limited to a mode in which the display size is large, and may be, for example, an animation display (a rocking display, a scrolling display, a flashing display, etc.).
In this way, by notifying the player of the game suspension state in which games (especially new games) cannot be played by the operation display 513, the player can be urged not to use the gaming machine 10. Also, if someone is cheating, the operation display 513 can urge the player to stop cheating.

When the game is stopped, if the decorative special chart change display game is being executed (change display) in the decorative game display units 81, 82, the decorative special chart change display game is forcibly terminated. Alternatively, the operation time movie 514 or the like may be displayed in a layer in front of the display layer of the decorative special chart change display game, so that the decorative special chart change display game can be continued in a state where it cannot be seen.

As described above, the display device 41 can display an error display in the game stop state in which the safety device is activated. For example, in FIG. 79(d) and FIG. 79(e), as a payout error display for notifying a payout error related to the payout of game balls, a ball out error display 92a (e.g., the characters "ball out error") for notifying a shoot ball out error corresponding to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow error display 92b (e.g., the characters "overflow error") for notifying an overflow error corresponding to the lower tray 23 being full are displayed on the display device 41. Here, it is assumed that a payout error related to the payout of prize balls due to winning that occurred before the game stopped state continues when or after the game stopped state. And, the payout error display such as the ball out error display 92a or the overflow error display 92b may be erased when the corresponding payout error is resolved.
In this way, even if the game is stopped due to the activation of the safety device, by notifying the occurrence of a payout error, it is possible to avoid causing disadvantage or inconvenience to players and hall personnel, etc. The game control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, etc. cooperate to constitute a notification means capable of notifying an error.

In addition, if an error or irregularity other than a payout error (such as a slot opening error or magnet irregularity) occurs when or after the game is stopped, an error message may be displayed to notify the player of the error or irregularity in order to prevent any disadvantage or inconvenience caused to the player or hall staff. Even if an error (particularly a payout error) or irregularity occurs, if the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000, the safety device will be activated and the game can be stopped.

In this embodiment, the payout error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the operation display 513 ("stopped"), but is not limited to this. That is, the payout error display may be displayed so as to overlap with the operation display 513, in which case the operation display 513 may be displayed on a layer in front of the payout error display so that the operation display 513 stands out, or the payout error display may be displayed on a layer in front of the operation display 513 so that the payout error display stands out.
Also, in order for the operation display 513 to stand out, the operation display 513 may be displayed in a larger display size than the payout error display, or in order for the payout error display to stand out, the payout error display may be displayed in a larger display size than the operation display 513. Also, in order for the payout error display to stand out, it is also possible to display the corresponding payout error display and not display the operation display 513 until the payout error is resolved.

Error displays such as payout errors can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") even in the operation notice state, and can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win ends") even in the operation warning state. In this case, to make the error display stand out, the error display can be displayed in a larger display size than the operation notice display 511 and the operation warning display 512, or can be displayed on a layer in front of the operation notice display 511 and the operation warning display 512 and overlapped on it.

When an error (particularly a payout error) occurs while play is stopped, in addition to an error display announcing the occurrence of the error, the occurrence of the error may be notified by sound from speakers 19a, 19b or by illumination of the performance LEDs. The notification of the error by illumination of the performance LEDs is performed by having some or all of the performance LEDs emit light in a specific illumination mode (e.g., red). For example, only the LED of the frame decoration device 18 (the LED of the frame) may emit light in a specific illumination mode, or only the LED of the board decoration device 46 (the LED of the game board 30) may emit light in a specific illumination mode, or the LEDs of both the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may emit light in a specific illumination mode.

In addition, the error notification mode (error notification method) for notifying the occurrence of an error (particularly a payout error) may be the same or different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state (in game or waiting for a customer state, not yet activated state, activation notice state, activation warning state). By making the error notification mode the same for the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is the same error. In addition, by making the error notification mode different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, it becomes easier for the player to recognize whether or not the game is stopped, and further, it becomes possible to notify the occurrence of an error in an error notification mode appropriate for each state (game stop state, state other than the game stop state). Note that errors such as payout errors and fraud may be notified by sound from the speakers 19a, 19b or by illumination of the performance LED, without displaying an error display on the display device 41.

In a configuration in which the error notification mode is different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, for example, when a shot ball out error occurs, in the game stop state, the error may be notified by the ball out error display 92a and the sound from the speakers 19a, 19b, and in the state other than the game stop state, the error may be notified by the ball out error display 92a and the illumination of the performance LED. Also, in this configuration, for example, when an overflow error occurs, in consideration of the need for emergency response, the error may be notified by the overflow error display 92b and the sound from the speakers 19a, 19b in common in the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, and the output mode (volume and pitch) of the sound from the speakers 19a, 19b may be different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state. In addition, in this configuration, when the game is stopped, an error may be notified by illuminating one of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and when the game is not stopped, an error may be notified by illuminating the other.

In addition, after the safety device counter value reaches the warning start value of 190,000 (the difference in the number of balls is 90,000) and the safety device enters an activation warning state, if the safety device counter value decreases (if the difference in the number of balls decreases), the activation warning display 511 ("Play will end soon") may be erased and hidden.
Specifically, for example, when the safety device counter value reaches 190000 and then decreases to 189000, the operation notice display 511 may be hidden. When a difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, the performance control device 300 may hide the operation notice display 511 when it determines that the safety device counter value is 189000 based on the difference ball command. Alternatively, as the safety device operation-related command transmitted in the safety device-related process (FIG. 69), in addition to the operation notice command corresponding to the operation notice state, the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state, and the operating command corresponding to the operating state, a non-operation command corresponding to the non-operation state may be provided, and when the safety device counter value is 189000, the non-operation command may be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 may hide the operation notice display 511 when it receives the non-operation command.

[Screen transition example 2]
Fig. 80 is another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing in chronological order the display screen of the display device 41. In Example 1 shown in Figs. 78 and 79, the operating state is reached without passing through the operating warning state, but in Example 2 shown in Fig. 80, a case will be described where the operating state is reached via the operating warning state.

After FIG. 79(b), many jackpots occur, and in FIG. 80(a), the safety device counter value is 194278, which is greater than the warning start value of 190000, so the operation warning display 511 ("The game will end soon") continues to be displayed. Here, the special chart 1 variable display game results in a jackpot, and the jackpot pattern "333" is displayed as a decorative stop pattern in the decorative game display sections 81 and 82. Note that the special chart 2 variable display game may also result in a jackpot here. Also, the result here may be a small jackpot rather than a jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot state starts, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the first round of the jackpot round game (game during the jackpot) is executed first. In the case of a small jackpot round game, a V entry occurs here, and the jackpot state due to the V entry starts from the next round 2. In the jackpot state, the jackpot entry port is opened, and the right hit instruction display 91 is displayed on the display device 41 along with the jackpot round performance accordingly. Here, a large number of prize balls (number of balls acquired, number of safe balls) are obtained by the entry into the jackpot entry port, and the safety device counter value has increased to 194,318, but since it has not reached the counter reference value of 195,000, the operation notice display 511 ("The game will end soon") continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to overlap the round performance so as not to be in the way, but the operation notice display 511 may be displayed so as to overlap the round performance.

After that, when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 during the big win, the safety device is not yet activated and enters an activation warning state, and as shown in FIG. 80(c), the activation notice display 511 is erased and the activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win") is displayed on the display device 41. In this embodiment, the display size of the activation warning display 512 is set to be larger than the display size of the activation notice display 511 (the activation notice display 511 displayed during the variable display). This makes it possible to suggest the possibility of the safety device being activated (the possibility of a game stop state occurring) more effectively than the activation notice display 511. Note that the display mode of the activation warning display 512 (the display mode that makes the activation warning display 512 stand out) is not limited to a mode that makes the display size larger, and may be, for example, an animation display (swinging display, scrolling display, blinking display, etc.). In this embodiment, the activation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap the round performance so as not to be in the way, but the activation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap the round performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(d), the ending performance of the big win is executed. Here, the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value 195000, but since the big win is in progress, the display of the operation warning display 512 continues. In this embodiment, the operation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap with the ending performance so as not to be a hindrance, but the operation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap with the ending performance. In addition, the ending performance in the operation warning state is different from the ending performance in the state other than the operation warning state (non-operation state, operation notice state), and is immediately before the operation of the safety device, so it may be a dedicated ending performance that suggests the operation (stop) of the safety device. The same applies when the ending performance of the small win is executed in the operation warning state.
In this way, the operation warning display 512 can warn the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of a small win or a big win, thereby warning the player that he or she will suffer a disadvantage such as the end of a winning streak. In addition, the operation warning display 512 can surprise a person who is cheating and encourage him or her to stop cheating.

After that, when the ending time has elapsed and the ending presentation of the big win has ended (i.e., when the big win state has ended), the safety device is activated (in operation), and the gaming machine 10 is in a game stop state. The same applies when the small win state has ended.
Then, when the safety device starts to be in an operational state, first, as shown in Fig. 80(e), an operation movie 514 is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that the safety device is starting to be in an operational state (that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value). Also, a performance display 515 is displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value. That is, in response to receiving the operation command, the performance control device 300 starts displaying the operation movie 514 and the performance display 515 again.
80(f), an operation display 513 ("playing stopped") notifying that the safety device is in operation is displayed on the display device 41. A manufacturer name display 516 showing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10 and an explanation display 517 showing how to display the menu screen 93 are also displayed, and the performance display 515 continues to be displayed even after the operation movie 514 ends.

In this embodiment, the display size of the operating display 513 is set to be larger than the display size of the operation warning display 512. This effectively indicates that the safety device is operating (play is stopped), and effectively prevents the player from using the gaming machine 10. Note that the display mode of the operating display 513 (a display mode that makes the operating display 513 stand out) is not limited to a mode in which the display size is large, and may be, for example, an animated display (a rocking display, a scrolling display, a flashing display, etc.).

As described above, the safety device-related displays, ie, the activation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon"), the activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win"), and the activation display 513 ("Play has stopped"), have different display modes because their display sizes increase in this order and the text displayed is different. Note that the display mode may include the text displayed in addition to the display size, display position, display color, font, etc.
Furthermore, the operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 have something in common. Specifically, they all have the character string "Uchidome" (end), and the character string may be displayed in the same color or font.
In this way, although the overall display patterns of the operation preview display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 are different, they have common parts, and therefore can be easily distinguished from displays other than safety device-related displays.

[Example of different activation notice displays depending on game status]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display 511 that is displayed depending on a gaming state other than waiting for customers (waiting for customers state).
As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change depending on the game state. In the example shown in FIG. 78 to FIG. 80, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") is different between the game state during waiting for customers (FIG. 79(a)) and the game state other than waiting for customers (during variable display (FIG. 78(d), (e), FIG. 79(b), (c)), during stop display (FIG. 78(f), FIG. 80(a)), and special game state (FIG. 80(b))), but is not limited thereto. For example, the game state other than waiting for customers includes a normal game state, a time-saving state, a probability-changing state, and a special game state, and as shown in FIG. 81, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be different between the normal game state, the time-saving state, the probability-changing state, and the special game state. This makes it possible to appropriately and effectively display the operation notice display 511 in the game state other than waiting for customers (during game play).
In Figures 81 (a) to (d), the safety device counter value is greater than the advance notice start value 190,000 and less than the counter reference value 195,000 (for example, 190,055).

FIG. 81(a) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the normal game state (normal mode).
In the normal game state, the number of winning balls (number of winning balls, number of safe balls) is not so high, so the safety device is unlikely to be activated and the game is stopped. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 in the normal game state is displayed in a display mode that does not interfere with other displays such as variable displays. In the example shown in Fig. 81(a), the operation notice display 511 is displayed in small vertical writing on the left edge of the display screen so as not to interfere with other displays.
In addition, during normal game play, in order to make the operation warning display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation warning display 511), the operation warning display 511 may be displayed near a display that the player is likely to notice (for example, a left hit instruction display instructing the player to hit with the left).

Fig. 81(b) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the time-saving state (time-saving mode). The display screen shown in Fig. 81(b) is the same as the display screen shown in Fig. 79(b).
In the time-saving state, it is easier to get prize balls than in the normal game state due to the normal power support, and furthermore, since there is a higher possibility of hitting a jackpot and increasing the number of safe balls than in the normal game state, there is a higher possibility of the safety device being activated than in the normal game state. Therefore, the activation notice display 511 in the time-saving state is displayed more prominently than the activation notice display 511 in the normal game state, and it is possible to more effectively suggest the possibility of the safety device being activated (the possibility of a game stop state occurring) than the activation notice display 511 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the time-saving state, in order to make the operation warning display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation warning display 511), the operation warning display 511 may be displayed near a display that the player is likely to notice (for example, the right-hit instruction display 91).

FIG. 81(c) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the probability bonus state (probability bonus mode).
In the probability variable state, the probability of hitting a jackpot and increasing the number of safe balls is higher than in the time-saving state, so the probability of the safety device being activated is higher than in the time-saving state. Therefore, the activation notice display 511 for the probability variable state is displayed more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511 for the time-saving state, so that the possibility of the safety device being activated (the possibility of a game stop state occurring) can be more effectively suggested than the activation notice display 511 for the time-saving state.
In addition, during a special probability state, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation notice display 511), the operation notice display 511 may be displayed near a display that the player is likely to notice (for example, the right hit instruction display 91).

Figure 81 (d) is the display screen of the display device 41 in a special game state (during a big win or small win).
In the special game state, the number of safe balls increases due to the opening of the big prize opening, so there is a higher possibility that the safety device will be activated than in the probability variable state. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 in the special game state is displayed more conspicuously than the operation notice display 511 in the probability variable state, so that the possibility of the safety device being activated (the possibility of a game stop state occurring) can be more effectively suggested than the operation notice display 511 in the probability variable state.
In addition, in a special game state, in order to make the operation warning display 511 stand out (to increase the likelihood that the player will notice the operation warning display 511), the operation warning display 511 may be displayed near a display that the player is likely to notice (for example, the right-hit instruction display 91).

In Fig. 81(d), a round effect is being performed in the same manner as in Fig. 80(b), but the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is different from that in Fig. 80(b). Specifically, the operation notice display 511 in the special game state shown in Fig. 80(b) is displayed in the same display mode as the operation notice display 511 in the time-saving state (Fig. 81(b)). On the other hand, the operation notice display 511 in the special game state shown in Fig. 81(d) is displayed in a different display mode from the operation notice display 511 in the time-saving state.
That is, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 in the special game state may be the same as or different from the display mode of the operation notice display 511 in the time-saving state. The same applies to other game states.

As described above, in the example shown in Fig. 81, the display size of the operation notice display 511 is large and easy to notice in the order of normal game state < time-saving state < probability variable state < special game state. Note that the display mode (color, font, etc.) other than the display size may be different according to these game states so that the operation notice display 511 is easy to notice in the order of normal game state < time-saving state < probability variable state < special game state.
In this way, by making the operation notice display 511 stand out in the order of normal game state < time-saving state < special game state < special game state, it is possible to effectively warn of the operation of the safety device other than when customers are waiting (during game play).

[Example of warning display before and after reaching the limit]
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display 511 that is displayed before and after a reach during a variable display.
As shown in Fig. 82, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be changed before and after the reach. This makes it possible to appropriately and effectively display the operation notice display 511 during the variable display.
Fig. 82(a) is a display screen of the display device 41 before the ready state is reached. The display screen shown in Fig. 82(a) is the same as the display screen shown in Fig. 79(b), but shows the state before the decorative special symbol is reached.

FIG. 82(b) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the N reach state.
When the reach state starts, the left pattern (the decorative special pattern displayed in the left variable display area 81a) and the right pattern (the decorative special pattern displayed in the right variable display area 81c) are temporarily stopped (e.g., swaying and fluctuating). As a reach effect, the word "reach" or the like may be displayed on the display device 41, or the sound "reach" or the like may be output from the speakers 19a, 19b.
The operation notice display 511 is displayed in a different display mode from the operation notice display 511 before the reach (FIG. 82(a)) so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left and right patterns, and further so as not to interfere with the SP reach performance that may be executed afterwards. Here, the operation notice display 511 has moved to the left edge of the display screen and is displayed vertically, smaller than before the reach.
At this stage, since the SP reach performance (display of a movie (video), operation of movable role objects, etc.) is not being executed, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner as the operation notice display 511 before the reach (FIG. 82(a)). In other words, the operation notice display 511 in the N reach state may be displayed in the same display size and in the same display position (between the first decorative game display section 81 and the first waiting memory display section 83a) and in the same display direction (horizontal writing) as the operation notice display 511 before the reach.

FIG. 82(c) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the SP reach state.
When the N reach state develops into the SP reach, the SP reach performance is executed. Here, the left and right patterns are reduced in size and moved to the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen, respectively, and a movie (video) is displayed large in the center of the display screen as the SP reach performance. Also, as the SP reach performance, the upper performance unit 40c, which is a movable role, moves downward from the initial position and is placed in the operating position in front of the display screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, the activation notice display 511 is already displayed in a different display mode than before the reach (FIG. 82(a)) at the N reach state (FIG. 82(b)) so as not to interfere with the SP reach performance, but is not limited to this. For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a different display mode than before the reach only at the SP reach state (FIG. 82(c)). Alternatively, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a different display mode than before the reach between the start of the N reach and the start of the SP reach (for example, just before it develops into an SP reach) in accordance with the SP reach performance.

[Example of warning display while waiting for passengers]
FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display 511 that is displayed in accordance with the customer waiting screen.
The performance control device 300 may cyclically switch the customer waiting screen displayed on the display device 41 during customer waiting in the order of (a) stop screen → (b) player setting screen → (c) customer waiting demo movie screen → (d) machine name display screen → (e) attention call display screen → (a) stop screen → (b) player setting screen → (c) customer waiting demo movie screen ... as shown in FIG. 83 by customer waiting demo editing processing (step S15) or hall/player setting mode processing (step S11), etc. Note that the customer waiting screen is not limited to these screens, and it is also possible to provide, for example, a game explanation screen that explains the contents of the game and the performance, a manufacturer display screen that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10, etc. as the customer waiting screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 83, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be changed during customer waiting. This makes it possible to display the operation notice display 511 appropriately and effectively during customer waiting.

The stop screen in Fig. 83(a) is a customer waiting screen that is first displayed when the decorative stop pattern "378" is displayed as shown in Fig. 79(f) and the stop display time has elapsed. The customer waiting screen is displayed on the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo flag is set (step A313) and a customer waiting demo command is sent to the performance control device 300 (step A314, step S147), but here, the stop screen that appears unchanged from Fig. 79(f) is displayed. Note that the appearance may also be changed by erasing the display in the change count display section 86 from Fig. 79(f), for example.
In the example shown in FIG. 83(a), decorative stop symbols are displayed in the decorative game display sections 81 and 82, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to interfere with the decorative stop symbols, etc.

The player setting screen in Fig. 83(b) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 seconds). On the player setting screen, a volume adjustment image 88a, which is a meter image for adjusting the volume, and a light amount adjustment image 88b, which is a meter image for adjusting the light amount (brightness) are displayed. Through the hall/player setting mode process (step S11), the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b is adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f, and the meter in the volume adjustment image 88a rises or falls, and the brightness of the LED for performance or liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) is adjusted in response to the operation of the cross key switch 28, and the meter in the light amount adjustment image 88b rises or falls.
In the example shown in Figure 83 (b), a volume adjustment image 88a and a light intensity adjustment image 88b are displayed in front of the display on the stopped screen (such as the display on display units 81 to 87) and the operation preview display 511, and are superimposed on the display on the stopped screen and the operation preview display 511.

The customer waiting demo movie screen in Fig. 83(c) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the player setting screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The customer waiting demo movie screen is configured to display a customer waiting demo movie 89, and here, a customer waiting demo movie 89 with a moving cherry blossom pattern is displayed. Also, here, the displays (decorative stop patterns, etc.) on the stop screen and the player setting screen are erased and hidden, and since there is no need to display the operation notice display 511 in consideration of the visibility of these displays, the display mode is changed so that the operation notice display 511 is larger than the operation notice display 511 displayed on the stop screen in Fig. 83(a) and the player setting screen in Fig. 83(b).
In the example shown in FIG. 83( b ), an operation notice display 511 is displayed superimposed on the customer waiting demo movie 89 , in front of the customer waiting demo movie 89 .

The model name display screen in Fig. 83(d) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the customer waiting demo movie screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The model name display screen displays the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model number (official name) "P Tora-Tora-Tora") as a model name display 90. Furthermore, the model name display screen may display a specific model display 67 (for example, the words "equipped with complete function") as a completion function display to inform the player, etc. that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).
In the example shown in Fig. 83(d), the operation notice display 511 is displayed in front of the model name display 90 and the specific model display 67, overlapping the model name display 90. Note that in the example shown in Fig. 83(d), the operation notice display 511 does not overlap the specific model display 67, but the operation notice display 511 may be displayed overlapping the specific model display 67. Furthermore, the specific model display 67 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen in Fig. 83(c).
Also, in the example shown in Figure 83 (d), the operation notice display 511 is displayed in the same display format (display size, color, font, display position, etc.) as the operation notice display 511 displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen (Figure 83 (c)), but it may be displayed in a different display format.

The attention-calling display screen in Fig. 83(e) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the model name display screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. After the attention-calling display screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the stop screen in Fig. 83(a) is displayed. Note that the display times of each customer waiting screen may be the same or different.
The attention-calling display screen displays an attention-calling display 68 to warn the player not to become addicted to the game. The operation notice display 511 may be displayed on a layer in front of the attention-calling display 68, or on a layer behind the attention-calling display 68.
In the example shown in Fig. 83(e), a specific model display 67 is also displayed. This specific model display 67 may be displayed in the same layer as the attention calling display 68, or may be displayed in a different layer. Note that in the example shown in Fig. 83(e), the operation notice display 511 does not overlap with the attention calling display 68 or the specific model display 67, but they may overlap.
In the example shown in Fig. 83(e), the display position of the operation notice display 511 is different from the display position of the operation notice display 511 displayed on the model name display screen (Fig. 83(d)), but they may be the same. In other words, the operation notice display 511 displayed on the attention display screen may be displayed in the same display form as the operation notice display 511 displayed on the model name display screen, or may be displayed in a different display form.

As described above, while waiting for customers, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be changed depending on other displays other than the operation notice display 511 or the display state of other image objects, i.e., the type of customer waiting screen that is cyclically switched (stop screen, player setting screen, customer waiting demo movie screen, model name display screen, warning display screen). Furthermore, while waiting for customers, the specific model display 67 may display that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a completion function).

[Example of the setting confirmation screen]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode).
84(a) is a display screen that is first displayed when the setting confirmation state is entered. In response to the setting confirmation state being entered, the performance control device 300 displays a setting confirmation display 545 (e.g., the text "setting confirmation in progress") on the display device 41 to notify that the setting is being confirmed (step S168). In addition, the performance control device 300 displays, together with the setting confirmation display 545, the text "setting history list" and an operation prompting image 546 that is an image that imitates an operation unit (here, the performance button 25) and that prompts a predetermined operation (pressing operation) on the display device 41. The operation prompting image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and may be an image that imitates the cross key switch 28.

Figure 84 (b) is a display screen that is switched from Figure 84 (a) and displayed when the operation unit is operated. The performance control device 30 displays a setting history list 548 on the display device 41 in response to the operation of the operation unit while the display screen shown in Figure 84 (a) is displayed. The setting history list 548 displays the presence or absence of setting changes and setting confirmations in order from the past to the present, and displays the probability setting value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation and the duration of the changed probability setting value. In addition, the performance control device 300 displays on the display device 41, together with the setting history list 548, an operation prompting image 546 that is an image imitating the operation unit (performance button 25) and that prompts an operation (push operation) to return to the screen of Figure 84 (a), and an operation prompting image 547 that is an image imitating the operation unit (performance button 25) and that prompts an operation (swipe operation) to scroll the setting history list 548 and view past history. Note that the operation prompt image 546 and the operation prompt image 547 here may be modeled after the cross key switch 28.

Furthermore, in the setting history list 548, a specified mark (here, a star) is displayed in the same row as the probability setting value in order to identify the probability setting value when the safety device is activated and play is stopped. This allows hall personnel to confirm whether a large number of balls (a large number of safe balls) was produced as intended at a high probability setting value (e.g., 5 or 6) that increases the probability of winning a jackpot or small jackpot, and whether the safety device was activated (play was stopped). The results of this confirmation can then be used to change the probability setting value in the future.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
Fig. 85 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display 67 (complete function display) displayed by something other than an image. In Fig. 85, the specific model display 67 is displayed by printing, printing out, painting, or the like. In Fig. 83, the specific model display 67 is displayed as an image on the display screen of the display device 41.

Figure 85 shows the collective display device 50 and its surroundings provided on the game board 30. Around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are displayed. The specifications include the indications 66a "1/300" and "1/200" of the jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), the indication 66b "3&2&10&14" of the number of prize balls, the indication 66c "3,6,9" of the upper limit of the number of rounds, the indication 66d "P Tora-Tora-Tora", and, in the case of a machine type that has a high probability state, the indication 66e of the presence or absence of a limit on the high probability jackpot (here, "no limit").

In the display 66b of the number of winning balls, the numbers of winning balls for the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 are displayed so that they can be recognized in that order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14.
A limit on a special jackpot means that the number of consecutive special jackpots is limited to a specified limit (a single jackpot can result in a specified limit number of jackpots (consecutive jackpots)).

In FIG. 85, the specific model display 67 is always displayed in a fixed manner, for example, by the characters "Equipped with complete function" printed, printed, or painted, to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (model equipped with a complete function). The specific model display 67 is always displayed even if the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and is always displayed, not displayed as an image on a specific screen as in FIG. 83. Therefore, the specific model display 67 is always easily recognizable by the player, and is more convenient for the player than the specific model display 67 displayed as an image. The specific model display 67 may be displayed in association with the display 66d, such as by displaying it near the model (official name) display 66d of the gaming machine 10, to give the impression that the gaming machine 10 is a model equipped with a safety device.

In the example shown in FIG. 85, the specific model display 67 printed, typed, painted, or otherwise displayed has the same character string "Complete function installed" (same display content) as the specific model display 67 displayed as an image in FIG. 83, but is not limited to this and may have a different character string (different display content). For example, if the character string of the specific model display 67 in FIG. 85 is shortened by partially omitting it to "Complete function" or the like, the surrounding area of the collective display device 50, which has little free space, can be used effectively.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of a specific model display 67 (complete function display) displayed other than as an image. In Fig. 86, the specific model display 67 is also displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like.

In FIG. 86, the specific model display 67 is displayed on a substantially flat front surface 456 of the decorative device 18a (top unit). The decorative device 18a protrudes diagonally upward toward the front from the upper portion of the glass frame 15 (or the opening and closing frame). On the front surface 456, a model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tora-Tora-Tora") is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like. The model name display 456a may have a different display mode or display content from the model name display 90 displayed on the display screen as an image, and the letter "P" may be omitted in the model name display 456a, and it may not be the model type (official name). Also, on the front surface 456, a character 456b related to the model name and capable of appearing on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided by printing, painting, or the like.
The specific model display 67 is provided, for example, near the end of the front portion 456, in the vicinity of the character 456b, by printing, printing-on, painting, or the like.

The front part 456 may be permanently fixed to the decorative device 18a, or may be detachable from the decorative device 18a for convenience and replaceable depending on the model. The front part 456 may also be capable of inserting a sheet or film on which the model name display 456a, characters 456b, and specific model display 67 are fixedly displayed by printing or the like, and the sheet or film may be visible from the front through a transparent member (transparent plastic, etc.). The sheet or film is convenient because it can be replaced depending on the model.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the performance control device 300, the operation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") may be displayed in the same manner (same size and same font) during the normal game state, time-saving state, probability variable state, and special game state, unlike Fig. 81. Also, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display, unlike Fig. 82, and the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the waiting for customers, unlike Fig. 83.

Also, the warning start value at which the safety device activation warning state starts (190000 in the above example), i.e., the timing at which the activation warning display 511 starts to be displayed, may be changed depending on the game state, etc. For example, in a normal power support state (high probability state, time-saving state), the activation warning display 511 may start to be displayed at a warning start value smaller than that in a normal game state, so that a warning can be given at an earlier timing in a game state where a jackpot is likely to occur.
In addition, a switch that can be operated by a hall official to turn the safety device (complete function) on and off may be provided on the back of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming control device 100 may be configured so that the safety device operates only when the switch connected to the gaming control device 100 is on.

[Menu screen]
87 and 88 show an example of a menu screen and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen.
For example, when the performance button 25 is operated while the customer waiting screen is displayed, the performance control device 300 displays a menu screen 93 on the display device 41, as shown in Fig. 87(a). The menu screen 93 is displayed in a layer (e.g., the foreground layer) in front of the customer waiting screen. Therefore, in the example shown in Fig. 87(a), the menu screen 93 is displayed in front of the model name display 90 ("P Tora Tora Tora") displayed in the model name display screen of the customer waiting screen, overlapping the model name display 90.

On the menu screen 93, five items can be selected: "Customize", "Smartphone Link", "Volume/Light", "Game Instructions", and "Back". The selection is made using the effect button 25 and the upper surface (touch panel 25b) of the effect button 25. Specifically, the touch panel 25b functions as a cursor key, and the effect button 25 functions as a confirmation key.
In other words, the player can operate (swipe) the touch panel 25b to position the cursor on a desired item among multiple items on the menu screen 93, and then operate (press) the effect button 25 when the cursor is positioned on the desired item, thereby selecting the desired item.

An item on which the cursor is placed is displayed larger than other items (items on which the cursor is not placed). That is, FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the cursor is placed on "smartphone linkage". When the performance button 25 is operated in this state, "smartphone linkage" is selected, and the performance control device 300 starts processing corresponding to "smartphone linkage".
The menu screen 93 includes a start menu screen 93a (see FIG. 87(a)) in which the “Smartphone Link” item is set to “Start Smartphone Link” and an end menu screen 93b (see FIG. 87(b)) in which the “Smartphone Link” item is set to “End Smartphone Link.”

The player operates the effect button 25 to call up the menu screen 93, for example, at the start and end of a game.
When the player calls up the menu screen 93 at the start of the game (for example, while the machine name display screen is displayed in the waiting state), a start menu screen 93a is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(a). When "Smartphone Linkage Start" is selected on this start menu screen 93a, the performance control device 300 starts accumulating the game history information of the player. In this embodiment, the game history information is accumulated as game result history such as the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots, and game achievement history such as mission achievement, content acquisition, and performance point acquisition, but the accumulated game history information may be at least one of the game result history, game achievement history, and other history.

When the player calls up the menu screen 93 again at the end of the game (for example, while the stop screen is being displayed while waiting for customers), the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(b). That is, when the menu screen 93 is called up with "Start smartphone linkage" selected on the start menu screen 93a, the end menu screen 93b is displayed on the display device 41. When "End smartphone linkage" is selected on this end menu screen 93b, the performance control device 300 displays the code screen 94 as shown in FIG. 87(c). Like the menu screen 93, the code screen 94 is displayed on a layer (for example, the foreground layer) that is closer to other displays and other image objects.

The code screen 94 allows the player to select two items: "End/Delete Linkage" and "Back." When the player selects "End/Delete Linkage" on the code screen 94, the currently accumulated game history information (for example, the game history information accumulated from when "Start Smartphone Linkage" was selected until "End Smartphone Linkage" was selected) is deleted, and the start menu screen 93a is displayed, or the display of the menu screen 93 and the code screen 94 is terminated. When the player selects "Back" on the code screen 94, the currently accumulated game history information is not deleted, and the end menu screen 93b is displayed.
In the code screen 94, an item on which the cursor is placed is displayed larger than other items (items on which the cursor is not placed) in the same manner as in the menu screen 93. That is, Fig. 87(c) shows a state in which the cursor is placed on "End Linkage/Delete".

Also, a two-dimensional code (here, a QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the code screen 94. When a player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the code screen 94 with a camera on a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone, the information terminal accesses a server outside the gaming facility, and the game history information accumulated this time is stored on the server. In other words, with the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player can use linked services (linked services) such as so-called smartphone linked services (mobile linked services).

The timing of operating the effect button 25 to call up the start menu screen 93a is not limited to the start of a game. Also, the timing of operating the effect button 25 to call up the start menu screen 93a is not limited to the time when waiting for customers.
In addition, the timing of operating the effect button 25 to call up the end menu screen 93b is not limited to when the game ends. In addition, the timing of operating the effect button 25 to call up the end menu screen 93b is not limited to when waiting for customers.

The menu screen 93 can also be displayed when the safety device is in an activated state.
As described above, when the safety device starts to be activated, first, as shown in Fig. 88(a), an activation movie 514 is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that the safety device is starting to be activated (that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value). Also, a performance display 515 is displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value. Note that, when displaying the performance display 515, the performance control device 300 may output a sound effect (for example, a "beep" sound) from the speakers 19a, 19b.

After that, when the operation movie 514 ends, the operation display 513 ("paused") is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (b). Here, the manufacturer's name display 516 and explanation display 517 are also displayed, and the performance display 515 continues to be displayed even after the operation movie 514 ends. This performance display 515 is erased (displayed) after a certain period of time has passed. In other words, the display time of the performance display 515 is set longer than the display time of the operation movie 514.

Thereafter, when the effect button 25 is operated, the menu screen 93 is displayed.
Specifically, when an operating state occurs and the effect button 25 is operated without "Smartphone Linkage Start" being selected on the start menu screen 93a, the start menu screen 93a is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(c). When "Smartphone Linkage Start" is selected on this start menu screen 93a, the accumulation of game history information is started and a game performance in which the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value is stored. Next, in response to the storage of the game performance or in response to the re-operation of the effect button 25, the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(d). When "Smartphone Linkage End" is selected on this end menu screen 93b, the code screen 94 is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(e).

On the other hand, if an operating state occurs and the effect button 25 is operated while "Smartphone Linkage Start" is selected on the start menu screen 93a, the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(d). Here, the operating state occurs while "Smartphone Linkage Start" is selected on the start menu screen 93a (i.e., while game history information is being accumulated), and the effect button 25 is then operated, so the game performance in which the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value has already been stored (accumulated) before the operation. Then, when "Smartphone Linkage End" is selected on the end menu screen 93b, the code screen 94 is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(e).

If "End Linkage/Delete" is then selected on the code screen 94, the currently accumulated game history information is deleted and the start menu screen 93a is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(c), or the display of the menu screen 93 and code screen 94 ends and the screen returns to that of FIG. 88(b). If "Back" is selected on the code screen 94, the currently accumulated game history information is not deleted and the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(d).

In response to receiving an operating command or in response to selecting "Start Smartphone Linkage" on the start menu screen 93a during the operating state, the performance control device 300 adds, for example, performance points as a game performance that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value (step S12). At that time, the number of points added may be greater than the number of points added by normal performance. This can reduce the discomfort of the player caused by the game being stopped. The performance point information is encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code, and is stored in an external server. Note that the performance point information indirectly becomes play stop information indicating the play stop, but the play stop information itself may be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code. This allows the player to access the external server at any time using an information terminal or the like, and display the performance point information and play stop information based on the occurrence of the operating state on the information terminal. Therefore, the player can show the performance point information and play stop information obtained by the operation (play stop) of the safety device to others, and feel satisfied.

In addition, even if "Smartphone Linkage Start" is selected on the start menu screen 93a during the operation state, the effect points are added, so that, for example, other players other than the player who generated the operation state can be given information on the effect points based on the occurrence of the operation state and information on the stop of the play. For example, after a player who was playing on the gaming machine 10 when the operation state occurred finishes playing on the gaming machine 10 and leaves the gaming machine 10, the other player can obtain information on the effect points based on the occurrence of the operation state and information on the stop of the play by operating the effect button 25 of the gaming machine 10 and selecting "Smartphone Linkage Start" and "Smartphone Linkage End" on the menu screen 93. Therefore, the other player can show the information he/she has obtained here to others and brag about it, thereby advertising the gaming store, etc.
In addition, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 minutes) has elapsed since the operating state occurred, the menu screen 93 may not be displayed even if the performance button 25 is operated (an operation to call up the menu screen 93).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the performance control device 300 can display on the display device 41 a menu screen 93 and a code screen 94 for allowing the player to select one item from a plurality of items. The menu screen 93 is displayed in common when the device is in an operating state (game stopped state) and when the device is not in an operating state (game stopped state). The code screen 94 is displayed in common when the device is in an operating state (game stopped state) and when the device is not in an operating state (game stopped state).
In other words, menu screen 93 lists a number of items, and menu screen 93 (see Figure 88) that is displayed when the safety device is in an activated state and menu screen 93 (see Figure 87) that is displayed when the safety device is not in an activated state are the same screen with all of the same items displayed as the number of items.
Further, the code screen 94 lists a number of items, and the code screen 94 (see FIG. 88) that is displayed when the safety device is in an activated state and the code screen 94 (see FIG. 87) that is displayed when the safety device is not in an activated state are the same screen with all of the same items listed as the number of items.

The menu screen 93 displayed when the safety device is in an activated state is displayed in a layer (e.g., the foreground layer) in front of other displays and other image objects, just like the menu screen 93 displayed when the safety device is not in an activated state. Therefore, in the example shown in Figures 88 (c) and (d), the menu screen 93 is displayed in front of the activation display 513 ("stopped"), the performance display 515, and the payout error displays 92a and 92b, overlapping these displays. Depending on the display mode of the menu screen 93 (display position, display size, etc.), the menu screen 93 may be displayed in front of the manufacturer name display 516, overlapping the manufacturer name display 516.

The code screen 94 that is displayed when the safety device is in operation is displayed in a layer (e.g., the foreground layer) in front of other displays and other image objects, just like the code screen 94 that is displayed when the safety device is not in operation. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 88(e), the code screen 94 is displayed in front of the operation display 513 ("stopped"), performance display 515, manufacturer name display 516, and payout error displays 92a and 92b, overlapping these displays.

When "Customize" is selected on the menu screen 93, a customization screen 95 is displayed for the player to customize the game presentation. On this customization screen 95, for example, the presentation mode and the background music output from the speakers 19a and 19b during the presentation can be customized.
When "Volume/Light Intensity" is selected on the menu screen 93, a volume/light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, which allows the player to adjust the volume and light intensity (brightness). On this volume/light intensity adjustment screen, for example, the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals for effect (display device 41, etc.) can be adjusted.

When the game is in operation (when the game is stopped), the game effects are not executed, so it is useless for the player to customize the game effects. Therefore, as shown in Figures 88 (c) and (d), in the menu screen 93 that is displayed when the game is in operation, "Customize" is displayed in an operation-invalidated state (e.g., grayed out), and although it is possible to move the cursor to "Customize" by operating the touch panel 25b (it is displayed larger than the other items), even if the effect button 25 is operated while the cursor is moved to "Customize", the operation is not accepted (i.e., the customization screen 95 is not displayed).

Also, as mentioned above, when play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 may be configured not to execute the hall/player setting mode processing (step S11) of the main processing (Figure 71), and to make the brightness of the presentation LED and LCD (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b unadjustable and set to the default brightness and volume, and this is assumed to be the case here.
Therefore, since it is useless for the player to adjust the volume or brightness when the device is in operation (when gameplay is stopped), as shown in Figures 88 (c) and (d), in the menu screen 93 that is displayed when the device is in operation, "Volume/Light" is displayed in an operation-inhibited state (for example, grayed out), and the cursor can be moved to "Volume/Light" by operating the touch panel 25b (it is displayed larger than the other items), but even if the effect button 25 is operated with the cursor moved to "Volume/Light", the operation is not accepted (i.e., the volume/light adjustment screen is not displayed).

FIG. 89 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the display on the display device 41 and the performance button 25.
As described above, in the game stop state, the performance control device 300 that has received the operating command turns off all the performance LEDs (all off) or turns on all the performance LEDs (all on). However, in the game stop state, there is a possibility that the performance button 25 is operated to display the menu screen 93. Therefore, when the performance LEDs are all turned off in the game stop state, the performance button 25 may exceptionally be turned on (emitted light) and the performance LEDs other than the performance button 25 may be turned off. Also, when the performance LEDs are all turned on in the game stop state, the brightness of the performance button 25 may be set to the same brightness as in normal times (for example, during play), and the brightness of the performance LEDs other than the performance button 25 may be set to a lower brightness than the normal brightness (or the brightness in the power saving mode).

Furthermore, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, operation of the performance button 25 is disabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the performance button 25 may be turned off while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, and turned on when the operation movie 514 ends. Furthermore, since operation of the performance button 25 is disabled while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the menu screen 93 cannot be called up. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88(a) and FIG. 89(a), the explanation display 517 is not displayed while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 89 (a), at the same time as the end of the operation movie 514 (the start of display of the operation display 513), the display of the explanation display 517 begins, the performance button 25 is switched to an enabled state, and the performance button 25 is switched to a lit state, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, as shown in FIG. 89( b ), the display of the explanation display 517 may start after the display of the operation display 513 starts.

In other words, the timing at which the display of the operation indication 513 starts and the timing at which the display of the explanation indication 517 starts may or may not be simultaneous.
In addition, the timing at which the display of the operation display 513 starts and the timing at which the performance button 25 is switched to the enabled state may or may not be simultaneous.
In addition, the timing at which the display of the operation indication 513 starts and the timing at which the performance button 25 is switched to the lit state may or may not be simultaneous.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display of the explanatory display 517 starts and the timing at which the performance button 25 is switched to the enabled state may or may not be simultaneous.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display of the explanatory display 517 is started and the timing at which the performance button 25 is switched to the lit state may or may not be simultaneous.
Furthermore, the timing at which the effect button 25 is switched to the enabled state and the timing at which the effect button 25 is switched to the lit state may or may not be simultaneous.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display of the operation time movie 514 ends and the timing at which the display of the operation in progress display 513 starts may or may not be simultaneous.

FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display on the display device 41 and the effect button 25 when the effect button 25 is in an enabled state while the activation movie 514 is being displayed.
In the example shown in Fig. 89, the operation of the effect button 25 is disabled while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, but this is not limiting. That is, as shown in Fig. 90, the operation of the effect button 25 may be enabled even while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.
90(a) and 90(b), when the effect button 25 is enabled while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, an explanation display 517 is displayed and the effect button 25 is lit while the operation movie 514 is being displayed. This makes it possible to encourage the user to operate the effect button 25 by the explanation display 517 and the illumination of the effect button 25 while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.

90(c), the effect button 25 may be turned on while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, so that the explanation display 517 is not displayed. In this way, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the illumination of the effect button 25 can prompt the user to operate the effect button 25.
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, even if the operation button 25 is in an enabled state, the operation button 25 may not be lit and the explanation display 517 may not be displayed.
In the example shown in Figure 90 (d), the timing for switching the performance button 25 to the lit state is simultaneous with the timing for starting to display the operation display 513, but this does not have to be simultaneous.
In the example shown in FIGS. 90(c) and 90(d), the timing at which the display of the instruction display 517 starts is set to be simultaneous with the timing at which the display of the operation display 513 starts, but this does not have to be simultaneous.
In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 90(b), (c), and (d), the timing for starting the display of the operation display 513 is set to be simultaneous with the timing for ending the display of the operation movie 514, but this does not have to be simultaneous.

If the effect button 25 is enabled while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, and the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the menu screen 93 may be displayed while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, or the menu screen 93 may be displayed after the operation movie 514 has ended. If the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed and the menu screen 93 is displayed after the operation movie 514 has ended, a specified sound may be output or a specified display may be displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 25 while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.

FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and a menu screen 93.
For example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), if the safety device is activated while the menu screen 93 (start menu screen 93a, end menu screen 93b) is being displayed, the performance control device 300 terminates the display of the menu screen 93 in response to receiving an activation command.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 91(b), if the safety device is activated while the menu screen 93 (start menu screen 93a, end menu screen 93b) is being displayed, the performance control device 300 may suspend the display of the menu screen 93 in response to receiving an activation command, and resume the display of the menu screen 93 in response to the end of the activation movie 514 (or the start of the display of the activation display 513). In this case, since the device is in the activation state when the display of the menu screen 93 is resumed, the menu screen 93 displayed in response to the end of the activation movie 514 is the menu screen 93 displayed in the activation state (for example, the menu screen 93 in which the display mode of "Customization" and "Volume/Light" is in an operation-invalidated mode).

In addition, when the display of the menu screen 93 is interrupted in response to receiving an operating command, the display of the menu screen 93 may be resumed in response to the operation of the performance button 25.
The menu screen 93 may be continued to be displayed even during the display of the operation movie 514. In this case, the menu screen 93 displayed on the display device 41 may be switched from the menu screen 93 displayed in the non-operational state to the menu screen 93 displayed in the operation state in response to the reception of an operation command.

92 to 94 are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and the item screen corresponding to the item selected on the menu screen 93. FIG.
For example, as shown in Figures 92(a), (b), and 94(a), when an item is selected on the menu screen 93 and the item screen corresponding to that item is displayed, if the safety device is activated, the performance control device 300 terminates the display of that item screen in response to receiving an activation command.

In the examples shown in Figures 92(a), (b) and 94(a), even if an item that can be selected during operation (an item that remains valid after operation; in this case, "Smartphone Link" and "Game Instructions") is selected, the display of the item screen ends when the operation state begins, just as in the case where an item that cannot be selected during operation (an item that is invalid after operation; in this case, "Customization" and "Volume/Brightness") is selected, but this is not limited to the above.
Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 93(a) and 94(b), when an operation state occurs while an item that can be selected during operation (an item that remains valid after operation) is selected and an item screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed, the performance control device 300 may suspend the display of the item screen in response to receiving an operation command, and resume the display of the item screen in response to the end of the operation movie 514 (or the start of the display of the operation display 513).
Alternatively, for example, as shown in Figures 93(b) and 94(c), if an operation state occurs when an item that can be selected during operation (an item that remains valid after operation) is selected and an item screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed, the performance control device 300 may continue to display the item screen even if it receives an operation command.

Note that Figure 92(a) shows an example in which "Customization", an item that cannot be selected during the operating state (an item that is invalid after activation), is selected before the operating state occurs, and customization screen 95 is displayed as the item screen; however, the same is true when "Volume/Light" is selected.
Also, Figures 92(b), 93(a) and (b) show an example in which "Game Instructions", an item that can be selected during the operating state (an item that is valid even after activation), is selected before the operating state occurs, and a game instruction screen 96 is displayed as the item screen, but the same is true when "Smartphone Link" is selected.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the menu screen 93 displayed while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.
During the display of the operation display 513, i.e., after the end of the operation movie 514, the only sound that can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b is the error sound. In contrast, during the display of the operation movie 514, various sounds such as background music for the operation movie, sound effects, and error sounds that notify the occurrence of an error can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Therefore, even in the operation state (game stop state), the performance control device 300 may execute the hall/player setting mode process (step S11) of the main process (FIG. 71) during the display of the operation movie 514, to adjust the brightness of the performance LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b, and may display the volume/light adjustment screen during the display of the operation movie 514 even in the operation state. In addition, the menu screen 93 may be displayed during the display of the operation movie 514, and the "volume/light amount" may be selected on the menu screen 93.

Specifically, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the start menu screen 93a (or the end menu screen 93b) may be displayed in which the display mode of "volume/light intensity" is the normal mode (operation enabled mode) rather than the operation disabled mode, and when the "volume/light intensity" is selected, the volume/light intensity adjustment screen may be displayed.

Also, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, a customization screen may be made displayable, allowing the player to customize the mode (such as background music or characters) of the operation movie 514. Specifically, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, a start menu screen 93a (or an end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "customize" is not the operation disabled mode but the normal mode, as shown in Fig. 95(b), may be displayed, and when the "customize" is selected, a customization screen 95 may be displayed.
In addition, if the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, a start menu screen 93a (or an end menu screen 93b) in which all items are displayed in the normal mode may be displayed, as shown in, for example, FIG. 95(c).

In addition, in the menu screen 93 and the code screen 94, the display mode of an item on which the cursor is positioned is not limited to a display mode in which the item is displayed larger than other items, but can be changed as appropriate, and for example, it may be a display mode in which the item is displayed in a color different from other items.
In addition, the items displayed in the operation-invalid mode are not limited to those that can be moved with the cursor, but cannot accept the operation even if the performance button 25 is operated with the cursor moved with the item. For example, the items displayed in the operation-invalid mode may be those that cannot even be moved with the cursor.
In addition, the operating means operated to display (call up) the menu screen 93 is not limited to the performance button 25, but may be, for example, the cross key switch 28.
In addition, the operating means operated to select one item from the multiple items displayed on the menu screen 93 is not limited to the touch panel 25b and the performance button 25, but may be, for example, a cross key switch 28.

In addition, the items provided on the menu screen 93 are not limited to "Customization", "Smartphone Link", "Volume/Light", "Game Instructions", and "Back". For example, "Game History" may be provided as an item that is selectable (valid) both before and after the safety device is activated, and "BGM" and "Auto Button" may be provided as items that are selectable (valid) before the safety device is activated but cannot be selected (invalid) after the safety device is activated.
In addition, the code displayed on the code screen 94 is not limited to a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark), but may be a one-dimensional code such as a barcode. In addition, the items provided on the code screen 94 are not limited to "End linkage/delete" and "Go back".

In addition, the display mode may be different between "Smartphone Link" (Smartphone Link Start) on the start menu screen 93a and "Smartphone Link" (Smartphone Link End) on the end menu screen 93b. Specifically, for example, the color of the text "START" in "Smartphone Link Start" may be different from the color of the text "END" in "Smartphone Link End". This allows the player to recognize at a glance whether the smartphone link has started or ended.
In addition, in this embodiment, the items listed on the menu screen 93 are provided as items that can be selected when the device is not in operation but cannot be selected when the device is in operation (such as "Customization" and "Volume/Light Intensity"). Conversely, however, items that cannot be selected when the device is not in operation but can be selected when the device is in operation may also be provided.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a menu screen 93 on which are provided items which cannot be selected when the device is not in operation but can be selected when the device is in operation.
For example, it is conceivable that the player may take a picture of the screen on which the operation display 513 ("playing stopped") is displayed (or the screen on which the operation movie 514 is displayed) to commemorate the fact that the safety device has been activated, i.e., the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value. Therefore, an item "commemorative photo" for such photography may be provided on the menu screen 93, and an image for the commemorative photo (for example, an image showing the name of the gaming facility, a background image or video dedicated to the operation state, etc.) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time in response to the selection of the "commemorative photo".

Before the operating state occurs, it may be useless for the player to instruct the gaming machine 10 to display an image for commemorative photography. Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 is in an operating state, for example, as shown in FIG. 96(a), the menu screen 93 may display a start menu screen 93a (or an end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "Commemorative Photography" is in the normal mode (operation-enabled mode), whereas when the gaming machine 10 is not in an operating state, for example, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the menu screen 93 may display a start menu screen 93a (or an end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "Commemorative Photography" is in the operation-disabled mode (e.g., grayed out), making it impossible to select "Commemorative Photography."

Alternatively, even before the occurrence of an operating state, if the operation is in an operation warning state, it is unlikely that the player's instruction to the gaming machine 10 to display an image for a commemorative photo will be in vain. Therefore, if the operation is in an operation warning state, the start menu screen 93a (or the end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode for "Commemorative Photo" is in the normal mode may be displayed as the menu screen 93, and if "Commemorative Photo" is selected during the operation warning state, the image for the commemorative photo may be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation movie 514 or the operation display 513 after the occurrence of the operating state.

Furthermore, even before the occurrence of an operating state, in the case of an operation notice state, it is less likely that the player's instruction to the gaming machine 10 to display an image for commemorative photography will be in vain, compared to the case of a non-operating state. Therefore, in the case of an operation notice state, the start menu screen 93a (or the end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "commemorative photography" is the normal mode may be displayed as the menu screen 93, and if "commemorative photography" is selected during the operation notice state or the operation warning state, the image for commemorative photography may be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation movie 514 or the operation display 513 after the occurrence of the operating state.
In response to the selection of "Commemorative Photo", in addition to (or instead of) displaying an image for the commemorative photo for a predetermined period of time, the manufacturer name display 516, the description display 517, etc. may be hidden for a predetermined period of time.

[Power recovery and operation display]
FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation display 513 that is displayed when power is restored.
As described above, except when the game is stopped due to a RAM abnormality (steps X25 to X29), when the power is turned on, the safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared).
On the other hand, when the RAM is initialized (when the power is turned on with RAM clearing), the safety device is deactivated by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0, but when the power is turned on normally (when the power is turned on without RAM clearing), the safety device activation flag area is not cleared. Therefore, if a power outage occurs while the safety device is activated and is then restored (when the power is turned on normally), the safety device will remain activated (play stopped) even after restoration. Therefore, in this case, after the power outage recovery screen is displayed (or while the power outage recovery screen is displayed, or instead of the power outage recovery screen), the activation display 513 ("play stopped") is displayed.

Specifically, if it is determined in the normal power-on processing (step X44, steps X48 to X51) that the safety device is in operation (step X50; Y), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is transmitted to the performance control device 300 (step X51).
Then, in response to receiving the command that the safety device is in operation, the performance control device 300 displays the operation display 513 as shown in FIG. 97(a) without displaying the operation time movie 514. At this stage, the safety device operation flag area is not cleared (the operation of the safety device is released), and the game is stopped. In order to release this game stop state, it is necessary to perform the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) of steps X45 to X47. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the performance control device 300 receives a command that the safety device is in operation, it displays the operation display 513, but does not display the performance display 515 or the explanation display 517. Also, in this case, it is not necessary to display the menu screen 93 even if the performance button 25 is operated.

In this way, when power is restored while the performance control device 300 is in an operating state (when a command that the safety device is in operation is received), it notifies hall personnel and the like that it is in an operating state (game play has been stopped) by displaying the operating display 513 (without displaying the performance display 515 or the explanation display 517) without displaying the operating movie 514.
On the other hand, when the operating state begins (when an operating command is received), an operating state movie 514 is displayed, followed by an operating display 513, a performance display 515, and an explanation display 517, thereby notifying hall personnel and the like that the machine is in an operating state (game play has been stopped).
Since the commands received when the power outage is restored during an operating state are different from those received when the operating state starts, the performance control device 300 can differentiate the notification mode for notifying that the safety device is in an operating state between when the power outage is restored during an operating state and when the operating state starts. By differentiating the notification mode when the power outage is restored during an operating state from the notification mode at the start of the operating state, it is possible to suggest that the safety device is in an operating state even though the safety device information has been cleared.

The notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state may be any mode different from the notification mode at the start of the operating state. In other words, the notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state may be a mode in which the operating movie 514 is displayed and then the operating display 513 is displayed (without displaying the performance display 515 or the explanatory display 517), or a mode in which the operating display 513, the performance display 515, and the explanatory display 517 are displayed without displaying the operating movie 514.

In addition, in response to receiving a command that the safety device is in operation, the performance control device 300 may display a prompting display 518 (e.g., the text "Please clear RAM") that urges the player to turn on the RAM initialization switch 112, along with the operation display 513, as shown in FIG. 97(b). This makes it possible to urge hall personnel and the like to clear the RAM and release the operation of the safety device (the game suspension state).

In addition, the command sent to the performance control device 300 when power is restored during the operating state and the command sent to the performance control device 300 when the operating state begins may be the same command. Specifically, for example, the game control device 100 may send an operating command when the operating state begins, and may send an operating command in addition to (or instead of) the command indicating that the safety device is operating when power is restored during the operating state. In this case, the notification mode when power is restored during the operating state may be the same as or different from the notification mode when the operating state begins.

[Safety devices and external information]
FIG. 98 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and the security signal and external information.
As shown in FIG. 59, if the safety device is in operation (step X519; Y), a security signal is output to an external device.
Also, as mentioned above, the jackpot 2 signal is output to an external device as external information for a long period of time during the jackpot state and during the time-saving state following the jackpot state (the time-saving state caused by the jackpot, the first specific game state, the first time-saving state).
Therefore, for example, as shown in Fig. 98, if the safety device starts to operate during the output of external information (such as a jackpot 2 signal), the output of the external information may be continued even during the operation of the safety device. In this case, the security signal based on the operation of the safety device may be output on top of the external information, as shown in Fig. 98.

98, a security signal based on the activation of the safety device is output to the external device for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), but is not limited to this. For example, a security signal may be output to the external device for only one pulse (e.g., 256 ms) when the safety device is activated, or the security signal may be output to the external device continuously while the safety device is activated.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during output of external information, the output of the external information may be interrupted and resumed after the power is restored.

[Initial operation of safety device and movable body]
The performance control device 300 performs an initial operation of the movable role when the gaming machine is powered on in order to check the operation of the movable role.
As mentioned above, when the power is restored during operation, the game is stopped, and in order to release this game stop state, it is necessary to perform RAM initialization. Since the initial operation of the movable role is performed when the RAM is initialized, if the initial operation of the movable role is performed when the power is restored during operation, the initial operation will be performed twice, at the time of power restoration during operation and at the time of RAM initialization, which is wasteful. Therefore, even when the power is turned on, when the power is restored during operation, the initial operation of the movable role may be exceptionally not performed.

99 is a flowchart for explaining the initial operation setting process. This initial operation setting process is executed, for example, in the movable body control process (step S23) of the main process (FIG. 67) of the performance control device 300.
In the initial operation setting process, the performance control device 300 first determines whether or not a command for initializing the RAM has been received (step S301). The command for initializing the RAM is transmitted in step X47 of the main process (FIG. 6). If the command for initializing the RAM has been received (step S301; Y), the initial operation flag is saved (step S304) and the initial operation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the command for initializing the RAM has not been received (step S301; N), it is determined whether or not a command for recovering from a power outage has been received (step S302). The command for recovering from a power outage is transmitted in step X49 of the main process (FIG. 6). If the command for recovering from a power outage has not been received (step S302; N), the initial operation setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if a power recovery command is received (step S302; Y), it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the safety device is in operation is received (step S303). The command indicating that the safety device is in operation is transmitted in step X51 of the main process (FIG. 6). If a command indicating that the safety device is in operation is received (step S303; Y), the initial operation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a command indicating that the safety device is in operation has not been received (step S303; N), the initial operation flag is saved (step S304), and the initial operation setting process is terminated.
After the initial operation setting process is completed, the performance control device 300 executes the initial operation process. In this initial operation process, if the initial operation flag is saved, a process is performed to cause the movable role to execute an initial operation. Therefore, if the initial operation flag is not saved in the initial operation setting process, the initial operation of the movable role is not executed.

That is, when a command for initializing the RAM is received (step S301; Y), the initial operation of the movable props is executed.
In addition, if a command is received when the power outage is restored but a command that the safety device is in operation has not been received (step S303; N), i.e., if a power outage occurs and is restored while the safety device is not in operation, the initial operation of the movable parts is executed.
On the other hand, if a command is received when the power outage is restored and a command is also received when the safety device is in operation (step S303; Y), that is, if a power outage occurs while the safety device is in operation and then restored, the initial operation of the movable parts is not executed.

[Operating state and power saving state]
The gaming machine 10 transitions to a power-saving state (power-saving mode) when a certain period of time has passed without a game being played. Also, the gaming machine 10 is configured not to transition to the power-saving state while in an operating state (while a game is stopped).
The performance control device 300 has a power saving function that reduces the power supplied to the performance devices (performance devices such as the display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, decoration devices, and movable role objects) and controls them to operate with less power consumption. Specifically, for example, when a power saving start command indicating the start of a power saving state is received from the game control device 100, the power saving function is turned on and the power consumed by various performance devices is reduced. On the other hand, when a power saving release command indicating the end of the power saving state is received from the game control device 100, the power saving function is turned off and the amount of power supplied to various performance devices is returned to the normal amount. Also, for example, when an operation command is received from the game control device 100, the power saving function is turned on and the power consumed by various performance devices is reduced. That is, the power saving function is turned on when transitioning to a power saving state, and the power saving function is also turned on when transitioning to an operation state.

Power consumption is set to decrease in the following order: normal state (neither power saving nor operating state) > power saving state > operating state. In other words, power consumption is set to be less when the power saving function is turned on in response to receiving an operating command (when the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is turned on) than when the power saving function is turned on in response to receiving a power saving start command (when the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned on).

During the operating state, the game control device 100 turns off all of the LEDs (collectively displayed device 50, etc.) controlled by the game control device 100. Also, as described above, the performance control device 300 that receives the operating command turns off (all off) or turns on (all on) all of the LEDs (performance LEDs) controlled by the performance control device 300. In other words, during the operating state, all performance LEDs are turned off or on.
During the power saving state, some or all of the performance LEDs are lit at a lower brightness than in a normal state that is neither the power saving state nor the operating state.

Therefore, when all of the performance LEDs are turned off during the operating state, the power consumption in the operating state is less than the power consumption in the power saving state.
On the other hand, when all the performance LEDs are turned on during the operating state, the performance LEDs are turned on with their luminance reduced so that the power consumption in the operating state is less than the power consumption in the power saving state.
In this way, by making the appearance of the presentation device (particularly the presentation LED) different between the power-saving state and the operating state, it becomes easier for hall personnel and players to recognize whether the state is the power-saving state or the operating state. Also, since the operating state (game stop state) consumes less power than the power-saving state, a person who sees the gaming machine 10 with the safety device activated is given the impression that it is "dark," and can recognize at a glance that the gaming machine is in the stopped state, effectively preventing new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10.
The brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the power saving state may be lower than that of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in a normal state that is neither the power saving state nor the operating state.
The brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the operating state may be lower than that of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in a normal state that is neither a power-saving state nor an operating state. The brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the operating state may be lower than that of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the power-saving state.

Figure 100 is a flowchart explaining the power saving mode processing. This power saving mode processing is processing for transitioning to a power saving state (power saving mode), and is executed, for example, in the special chart normal processing (Figure 22), when the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0 and the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0 (step A307; Y). In Figure 22, the illustration of the power saving mode processing is omitted.

In the power saving mode processing, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the power saving state flag has been saved (step A801). If the power saving state flag has not been saved (step A801; N), i.e., if the device is not in the power saving state (power saving mode), it determines whether or not the safety device is in operation (step A802). For example, if the safety device in operation flag is set to "1" in the safety device in operation flag area, indicating that the safety device is in operation, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device in operation flag = 1). If the safety device is in operation (step A802; Y), the power saving mode processing is terminated. In other words, the power saving state (power saving mode) does not occur during operation.

On the other hand, if the safety device is not in operation (step A802; N), the normal game processing number is checked (step A803) to determine whether normal normal processing is in progress (step A804). If normal normal processing is not in progress (step A804; N), the power saving mode processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the normal map is being processed (step A805; Y), it is checked whether the number of reserved normal maps is 0 (step A806). If the number of reserved normal maps is not 0 (step A806; N), the power saving mode processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved normal games is 0 (step A806; Y), information related to the error state of the gaming machine 10 is acquired (step A807), and it is determined whether the gaming machine 10 is in an error state (step A808). If the gaming machine 10 is in an error state (step A808; N), the power saving mode process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the gaming machine 10 is not in an error state (step A808; Y), the touch detection signal of the operation handle 24 is checked (step A809) to determine whether or not there has been a change in the touch state (step A810). If there has been a change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A810; Y), the power saving mode process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A810; N), a power saving start command is prepared (step A811), and a performance command setting process is performed (step A812). As a result, the power saving start command is transmitted to the performance control device 300.
Next, the power saving state flag is saved (step A813), and the power saving mode process is terminated. This causes the device to transition from a normal state, which is neither a power saving state nor an operating state, to a power saving state (power saving mode).

The processing of steps A809 and A810 may be repeated multiple times (for example, for 10 minutes). Specifically, after determining that the gaming machine 10 is not in an error state (step A808; Y), the processing of steps A809 and A810 may be performed a specified number of times. If it continues to determine that there is no change in the touch state of the operating handle 24 (step A810; N), the processing of step A811 may be started. If there is a change in the touch state of the operating handle 24 before the number of times that the processing of steps A809 and A810 has been performed reaches the specified number (step A810; Y), the power saving mode processing may be terminated.

If the power saving state flag has been saved (step A801; Y), i.e., if the device is in a power saving state (power saving mode), the touch detection signal of the operation handle 24 is checked (step A814) to determine whether there has been a change in the touch state (step A815). If there has been no change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A815; N), the power saving mode process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A815; Y), a power saving release command is prepared (step A816), and a performance command setting process is performed (step A817). As a result, the power saving release command is transmitted to the performance control device 300.
Next, the power saving state flag is cleared (step A818) to end the power saving mode process, thereby transitioning from the power saving state (power saving mode) to a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state.

Fig. 101 is a flowchart for explaining the power saving function setting process. This power saving function setting process is a process for turning on/off the power saving function of the performance control device 300, and is executed, for example, in the power saving control process (step S16) of the main process (Fig. 67) of the performance control device 300.
In the power saving function setting process, the performance control device 300 first determines whether or not the power saving function ON flag has been saved (step S401). If the power saving function ON flag has not been saved (step S401; N), that is, if the power saving function is off, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not an operating command has been received (step S402).

When an operating command is received (step S402; Y), the power saving function ON flag is saved (step S403), the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is turned on (step S404), and the power saving function setting process is terminated. As a result, the amount of power supplied to each of the performance devices becomes the amount supplied in the operating state (< the amount supplied in the power saving state).
On the other hand, if the in-operation command has not been received (step S402; N), it is determined whether or not the power saving start command has been received (step S405).

If the power saving start command has not been received (step S405; N), the power saving function setting process ends.
On the other hand, if a power saving start command is received (step S405; Y), the power saving function ON flag is saved (step S406), the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned on (step S407), and the power saving function setting process is terminated. As a result, the amount of power supplied to the various performance devices becomes the amount supplied in the power saving state (<the amount supplied in the normal state, neither in the power saving state nor in the operating state).

Also, if the power saving function ON flag has been saved (step S401; Y), that is, if the power saving function is ON, it is determined whether or not a power saving release command has been received (step S408).
If the power saving release command has not been received (step S408; N), the power saving function setting process ends.
On the other hand, if a power saving release command is received (step S408; Y), the power saving function ON flag is cleared (step S409), the power saving function is turned off (step S410), and the power saving function setting process is terminated. As a result, the amount of power supplied to the various performance devices returns to the normal supply amount (the amount supplied in the normal state, neither in the power saving state nor in the operating state).

As shown in Fig. 100 (power saving mode processing), the power saving release command can be sent only when the device is in the power saving state (when the power saving state flag is saved), and is not sent when the device is in the operating state. Therefore, when the power saving release command is received, the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is on, but the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is off. Therefore, in step S410, the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned off.
In this embodiment, the power saving state flag and the power saving function ON flag are cleared by a power outage (power cut-off), but the present invention is not limited to this.
In addition, in this embodiment, the power saving function of the performance control device 300 is turned off by a power outage (power interruption), but this is not limited to this.

[effect]
The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which game cannot be executed upon the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and a display control means (performance control device 300) that can display a menu screen 93 including a plurality of items on the display device 41, and the menu screen 93 that can be displayed before the game-disabled state occurs and the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in the game-disabled state have the same plurality of items, and any of the plurality of items can be selected on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed before the game-disabled state occurs, but cannot be selected on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in the game-disabled state (Figures 87 and 88).

For example, if there is an item that is selectable before the occurrence of a non-playable state but cannot be selected in the non-playable state, and a menu screen showing that item is displayed before the non-playable state occurs, and a menu screen not showing that item is displayed in the non-playable state, it is necessary to create a menu screen for before the non-playable state occurs and a menu screen for the non-playable state.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, when there is an item that is selectable before the occurrence of a non-playable state but is non-selectable in the non-playable state, the same menu screen 93 is displayed for the items listed before the occurrence of the non-playable state and in the non-playable state, so there is no need to create a menu screen for before the occurrence of a non-playable state and a menu screen for the non-playable state, thereby reducing development costs.
In addition, by deliberately displaying items that cannot be selected in the game-unavailable state on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in the game-unavailable state, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is unavailable. In particular, by making the items for setting the game effects (such as "customization" and "volume/light intensity") unselectable despite being displayed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is unavailable, i.e., that the game cannot be resumed. Thus, the menu screen 93 has not only the original function of presenting items to the player, but also the function of suggesting to the player whether the game is unavailable (game cannot be resumed) or not.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can display an effective menu screen 93 suitable for displaying in a non-playable state while keeping development costs down.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which game cannot be executed upon the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a display control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling the display device 41, and the display control means is capable of displaying a movie (e.g., operating movie 514) at the start of the game-disabled state, and is capable of displaying a menu screen 93 while the game-disabled state is occurring and after the movie has ended (Figures 88 and 89).

Therefore, a play-unavailable state can be generated when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and a movie (e.g., operation movie 514) can be displayed at the start of the play-unavailable state, making it possible to effectively prevent fraud and also to effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.
Furthermore, since the menu screen 93 can be displayed after the end of a movie (for example, the operation movie 514), it is possible to prevent the visibility of the movie from decreasing (the menu screen 93 obstructing the view and making it difficult to see), and it is possible to effectively suggest (notify) the onset of a non-playable state by using the movie.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game-prohibited state (game stop state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling the display device 41. The display control means is capable of displaying a first notification image (operation movie 514) notifying the occurrence of the game-prohibited state in response to the occurrence of the game-prohibited state, and then displaying a second notification image (operation display 513) notifying the occurrence of the game-prohibited state, and is capable of displaying a menu screen 93 in response to the operation of the operation means (presentation button 25) by the player, and can be configured so that operation of the operation means is invalid while the first notification image is displayed, and operation of the operation means is valid while the second notification image is displayed (Figs. 88 and 89).

Therefore, while the second notification image is being displayed, the menu screen 93 can be displayed, but while the first notification image is being displayed, the menu screen 93 cannot be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the first notification image, which is displayed first among the first and second notification images that notify the occurrence of a no-play state, from being obscured by the menu screen 93, and therefore it is possible to effectively notify the occurrence of a no-play state by the notification image.
In addition, the first notification image is not limited to a movie (video) and may be a still image.
Furthermore, when the safety device is activated, for example, a notification image may be displayed on the display device 41 or the like the following day to notify the user that "the safety device was activated yesterday."

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a display control means (performance control device 300) that can display a menu screen 93 on the display device 41, and the display control means can be configured to terminate the display of the menu screen 93 if a game-disabled state occurs while the menu screen 93 is being displayed (Figure 91).

Therefore, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, a non-playable state can occur, and when a non-playable state occurs while the menu screen 93 is being displayed, the display of the menu screen 93 is terminated (forced to close), so that it is possible to effectively take measures against fraud and also to effectively prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. In other words, when a non-playable state occurs while the menu screen 93 is being displayed, the display of the menu screen 93 is terminated (forced to close) and the displayed menu screen 93 is hidden at a timing not intended by the player, so that it is possible to suggest (notify) the player of the occurrence of a non-playable state, so that it is possible to effectively take measures against fraud and also to effectively prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.
Furthermore, for example, when displaying a notification image to notify the occurrence of a state in which play is not possible, the display of the menu screen 93 can be terminated (forced termination) to prevent a decrease in visibility of the notification image (the notification image being obscured by the menu screen 93), thereby enabling the occurrence of a state in which play is not possible to be effectively notified by the notification image.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the display control means can be configured to display the menu screen 93 in response to the player operating the operation means (effect button 25), and to re-display the menu screen 93 if the operation means is operated after the display of the menu screen 93 has been terminated (forced termination) (Figure 91 (b)).

Therefore, even when a game stop state occurs, the player can call up the menu screen 93. Then, for example, when the smartphone-linked service can be used by calling up the menu screen 93, the smartphone-linked service can be used even when a game stop state occurs to store game history information (game result history, game achievement history, etc.) in an external server, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
It should be noted that the menu screen 93 may be redisplayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the menu screen 93 was terminated (forced termination), even if no operation is performed on the operating means.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the menu screen 93 displayed before the occurrence of a non-playable state and the menu screen 93 displayed after the occurrence of a non-playable state are the same screen, but can be configured to have different display formats (Figure 91 (b)).
Therefore, depending on the display mode of the menu screen 93, it is possible to indicate to the player whether the state is before the occurrence of a non-playable state or after the occurrence of a non-playable state.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling the display device 41, and the display control means is capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., operating display 513) while the game-disabled state is occurring, and can be configured so that the display mode of the predetermined display differs between when the game-disabled state is occurring and when recovery (power on) is achieved from a power outage (power cut) that occurred while the game-disabled state is occurring (Figure 88 (b), Figure 97 (a) (b)).

Therefore, when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, a state in which play is not possible can be generated, and a certain display (e.g., operation display 513) can be displayed while the state in which play is not possible is generated, so that measures against fraud can be effectively taken and also player addiction to the game can be effectively prevented.
In addition, since the display mode of the predetermined display (e.g., the operation display 513) differs between when a non-playable state occurs and when a power outage that occurred during a non-playable state is restored, the display mode of the predetermined display can suggest to the player whether a non-playable state occurs or when a power outage occurred during a non-playable state and was restored. In other words, it can suggest to the player when the non-playable state occurred (today, yesterday or before, etc.). In addition, the predetermined display can let the hall personnel know that the game is suspended, which can prevent mistakes such as opening the hall while the game is suspended.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a notification means (display device 41) that can notify the occurrence of the game-disabled state, and can be configured so that the notification manner of the notification means differs when a game-disabled state occurs and when a power outage occurs during the game-disabled state and is then restored (Fig. 88 (b), Fig. 97 (a) (b)).

Therefore, depending on the notification mode of the notification means, it is possible to indicate to the player whether a play-disabled state has occurred or a power outage has occurred while a play-disabled state was occurring and has since been restored.
In this embodiment, the occurrence of a play-disabled state is notified in different notification modes by display on the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence of a play-disabled state may be notified by a presentation device other than the display device 41. In other words, the notification means capable of notifying the occurrence of a play-disabled state is not limited to the display device 41, and may be a presentation device other than the display device 41. Furthermore, the notification means may be one presentation device or multiple presentation devices.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a movable presentation device (movable role (movable body, board presentation device 44, frame presentation device, etc.)) that performs a predetermined presentation operation, and a display device 41 that displays a predetermined presentation, and the display device 41 is capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., an operating display 513) while a game-disabled state is occurring, and when recovery (power-on) is achieved from a power outage (power cut) that occurred while a game-disabled state is occurring, the movable presentation device performs an initial operation, and the display device 41 can be configured to resume displaying the predetermined display.

Therefore, when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, a state in which play is not possible can be generated, and a certain display (e.g., operation display 513) can be displayed while the state in which play is not possible is generated, so that measures against fraud can be effectively taken and also player addiction to the game can be effectively prevented.
In addition, when a power outage that occurred while a game was not possible is restored, the movable presentation device performs an initial operation while a specified display (e.g., operation display 513) is displayed on the display device 41, and this initial operation increases the likelihood that hall staff and the like will notice the operation display 513 displayed on the display device 41.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a movable presentation device (movable role (movable body, board presentation device 44, frame presentation device, etc.)) that performs a predetermined presentation operation, and the movable presentation device performs an initial operation when the power is turned on (recovery from a power outage), and can be configured to exceptionally not perform the initial operation if a power outage occurs during the occurrence of a game-disabled state and the power is turned on (recovery from a power outage that occurred during the occurrence of a game-disabled state) (Figure 99).

Therefore, since a state in which play is not possible can be generated when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to effectively prevent fraud and also effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.
In addition, when a power outage occurs while a game-unavailable state is occurring, the initial operation of the movable presentation device is exceptionally not performed even after the power is restored, so that hall personnel and others can understand that game play is suspended, and mistakes such as opening the hall while game play is suspended can be prevented.
In addition, if a power outage occurs during the occurrence of a non-playable state and the power is turned on (power on without clearing the RAM), the non-playable state remains after the power is turned on, and in order to release the non-playable state, it is necessary to turn the power on again (power on with clearing the RAM). Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device is performed when the power is turned on again, no inconvenience occurs even if the initial operation of the movable presentation device is omitted when a power outage occurs during the occurrence of a non-playable state and the power is turned on. In addition, by omitting the initial operation of the movable presentation device when a power outage occurs during the occurrence of a non-playable state and the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately perform processing to release the non-playable state, which is easy to use.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, operating state) in which game cannot be executed when predetermined conditions are met, and a power-saving state generating means (presentation control device 300) that can generate a power-saving state (power-saving mode), and can be configured so that the power consumption during the game-disabled state is less than the power consumption during the power-saving state (Figures 100 and 101).
Specifically, a power saving state can be created in which the power supplied to the presentation devices (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, decorative devices, movable parts, etc.) is reduced, and while a no-play state occurs, the power supplied to the presentation devices is reduced, so that the power consumption in the no-play state can be configured to be less than the power consumption in the power saving state.

Therefore, power can be saved not only during a power saving state but also during a non-playable state, and since the power consumption differs between the non-playable state and the power saving state, the overall state of the gaming machine 10 (e.g., the light emission state) differs between the non-playable state and the power saving state. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the gaming machine 10 is in the non-playable state or the power saving state depending on the overall state of the gaming machine 10.
In addition, a game-unplayable state can be generated when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and since the power consumption during the game-unplayable state is less than that during the power-saving state, it is possible to effectively take measures against fraud and also effectively suppress a player's addiction to games. In other words, since the power consumption during the game-unplayable state is lower than that during the power-saving state, it is possible to give the impression that the game machine 10 in which the game-unplayable state is occurring is "dark," allowing the player to recognize at a glance that the game machine is in a game-unplayable state, and it is possible to effectively prevent new players (customers) from using the game machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (operation condition), and a notification means (e.g., a game control device 100, a presentation control device 300, a display device 41, etc.) capable of notifying an error related to the payout of gaming media in the game-disabled state.

In such a gaming machine 10, when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game and take appropriate measures against fraud, and by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it is also possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. In addition, even in a state where the game cannot be played, it is possible to notify an error, and appropriate measures against fraud can be taken while preventing any disadvantage or inconvenience from occurring to the player or hall personnel, etc.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (operation condition), and a display control means (e.g., the performance control device 300) capable of displaying a warning display (e.g., an operation warning display 511) on a display means (e.g., the display device 41) to warn that the game-disabled state will occur. The display control means changes the display mode of the warning display depending on the game state (e.g., waiting for customers, variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, when a certain condition is met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game and take appropriate measures against fraud, and it may also be possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. The warning display (e.g., the operation warning display 511) notifies the player in advance of the possibility that he or she may be unable to play, urging the player to end the game and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. The warning display can also surprise someone who is cheating and urge them to stop cheating. The warning display can be displayed in a different manner depending on the game status (e.g., while waiting for customers, while a variable display is being displayed), making it possible to effectively display the warning display.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment also includes a payout control means (e.g., a payout control device 200) capable of paying out gaming media, and a first counting means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the payout number (e.g., the total number of winning balls in a predetermined period), which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out in a predetermined period or the number of gaming media decided to be paid out in a predetermined period. The gaming machine 10 also includes a second counting means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100 or an out ball detection switch 74) capable of counting the number of uses (e.g., the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls), which is the number of gaming media used in a predetermined period. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes a calculation means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., a safety device counter value or a difference ball number) based on the payout number and the number of uses. When the calculated value becomes a reference value (e.g., counter reference value, ball difference reference value), the game stop means (e.g., safety device) can generate a game unplayable state by determining that a predetermined condition (activation condition) is met. The display control means (e.g., performance control device 300) can display a predetermined display (e.g., operation display 513) on the display means to indicate that the game is unplayable.

In such a gaming machine 10, a state where play is not possible can be generated based on a calculated value based on the number of gaming media paid out and the number of gaming media used (e.g., the number of balls fired or discharged), and a predetermined display indicating that play is not possible (e.g., the in-operation display 513) can be displayed, so that fraud prevention measures can be effectively implemented and also player addiction to the game can be effectively suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when a calculated value (e.g., a safety device counter value or a difference in number of balls) becomes a predetermined value (notification start value) smaller than a reference value, the display control means can display a notification display (e.g., an operation notification display 511) on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify in advance that a state in which play is not possible will occur.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when a calculated value (e.g., safety device counter value or difference in number of balls) reaches a reference value but a predetermined condition (activation condition) is not met, the display control means (e.g., performance control device 300) can display on the display means a display (e.g., activation warning display 512) that is different from the predetermined display (e.g., in-operation display 513) and the advance notice display (e.g., activation advance notice display 511). Therefore, the player can be notified in advance that the game will be stopped after the predetermined condition is met (e.g., after the end of a small win or a big win), and the player can be warned that he or she will suffer a disadvantage.

"Modification of error display during operation (game stop state)"
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 79(e) and Fig. 80(f), the payout error display such as the bulb out error display 92a and the overflow error display 92b is displayed so as not to overlap with the operation display 513, but this is not limiting. For example, an error display for notifying an error (payout error, other error or fraud) may be displayed so as to overlap with the operation display 513, and in that case, the error display may be displayed in a layer (e.g., the top layer) in front of the operation display 513, as shown in Fig. 102, for example.

In this application, "overlapping display" or "overlapping display" means displaying at least a part of one display and at least a part of the other display so that they overlap. That is, it may be a mode in which a part of one display overlaps a part of the other display, a mode in which a part of one display overlaps the whole of the other display, or a mode in which the whole of one display overlaps the whole of the other display.
In addition, in this application, "displayed simultaneously" or "displayed at the same time" means displaying such that at least a portion of the display period during which one display is displayed overlaps with at least a portion of the display period during which the other display is displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 102, in addition to payout error displays 92a and 92b that notify of payout errors regarding the payout of game balls, an other error display 92c that notifies of errors other than payout errors or fraud is also displayed.
Also, in the example shown in Figure 102, the payout error displays 92a and 92b are displayed in a manner that allows players, game center staff, etc. to understand the content of the error that has occurred, whereas the other error display 92c is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for players, game center staff, etc. to understand the content of the error that has occurred.

Specifically, of the payout error displays 92a, 92b, the ball out error display 92a displays the words "ball out error" as the ball out error display 92a, so that a player or game center attendant can see the ball out error display 92a and recognize that an error has occurred, and can also understand that the error that has occurred is a shoot ball out error, which corresponds to a shortage of game balls before payout.
Furthermore, as for the overflow error display 92b out of the payout error displays 92a, 92b, the words "overflow error" are displayed as the overflow error display 92b, so that a player or arcade attendant can see that an error has occurred and can understand that the error that has occurred is an overflow error corresponding to the lower tray 23 being full.

On the other hand, for the other error display 92c, an error code is displayed as the other error display 92c, so that the player, the attendant of the game arcade, etc. can recognize that some kind of error has occurred by looking at the other error display 92c, but cannot grasp the content of the error that has occurred. Note that while the error code does not allow the player or the attendant of the game arcade to grasp the content of the error that has occurred, the person in charge of the game arcade, the gaming machine manufacturer, etc. can grasp the content of the error that has occurred.
In other words, the other error display 92c notifies the player, amusement facility attendants, etc. that an error has occurred in a manner that is recognizable by the player, amusement facility attendants, etc., while also notifying the player and amusement facility attendants, etc. in a manner that is difficult for them to grasp the content of the error that has occurred (although the amusement facility manager, gaming machine manufacturer, etc. can grasp it (easily grasped)).

In this modified example, a 6-digit (3-byte) error code is displayed as other error display 92c, as shown in Fig. 102. For example, as shown in Fig. 103(a), each error is assigned to bits 0 to 23, and when an error occurs, the performance control device 300 turns on the corresponding bit, converts binary to hexadecimal, generates an error code, and displays the generated error code on the display device 41 as other error display 92c.
For example, if a dispensing abnormal error and a starting port error occur, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the bit "1" to which the dispensing abnormal error is assigned and the bit "2" to which the starting port error is assigned are turned ON, an error code "000006" is generated, and the generated error code is displayed as the other error display 92c on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 102.
In this modified example, a payout abnormality error is defined as an error other than a payout error or fraud, but is not limited to this, and a payout abnormality error may be defined as a payout error.

When an error occurs before the game is stopped, the performance control device 300 displays the corresponding error display on the top layer. If the error is not resolved, the performance control device 300 continues to display the error display on the top layer until the error is resolved, even after the game is stopped.
Therefore, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c may be displayed at the same time as the operation notice display 511 (e.g., the text "Ending soon"), in which case the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c will be displayed on a layer in front of the operation notice display 511. In other words, when the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are displayed overlapping the operation notice display 511, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c will be displayed in front of the operation notice display 511.
Furthermore, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c may be displayed at the same time as the operation warning display 512 (e.g., the text "Play will end after winning"), in which case the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c will be displayed on a layer in front of the operation warning display 512. In other words, when the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are displayed overlapping the operation warning display 512, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c will be displayed in front of the operation warning display 512.

The game control device 100 monitors all errors before the game is stopped, and continues to monitor all errors even after the game is stopped. If an error occurs when or after the game is stopped, the presentation control device 300 displays the corresponding error display in the top layer, and continues to display the error display in the top layer until the error is resolved. In other words, if an error occurs during a game stop state, the presentation control device 300 starts displaying the corresponding error display when the error occurs, in the same way as if an error occurs during normal times (when the game is not stopped).

In this way, by monitoring and reporting all errors during a game stop state, just as before the game stop state, it is possible to make the player aware of the state of the gaming machine (that an error is occurring) even after the game stop state has been entered.
In this modified example, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are displayed on the top layer, but this is not limited to this, and the layer that displays the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c may be any layer that is closer to the safety device-related displays (activation preview display 511, activation warning display 512, and activation display 513).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game stop state (unplayable state, operating state) in which game cannot be executed upon the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and a display control means (performance control device 300) that can display on the display device 41 a notification display (operating display 513) that notifies that a game stop state has occurred, and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c that notify that an error has occurred, and the display control means is capable of simultaneously displaying the notification display (operating display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c (Figure 102).
That is, when the occurrence of a game stop state and an error state overlap, the notification display (operation display 513) and the corresponding error display 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed. Therefore, even after the game stop state, the player can be made aware of the state of the gaming machine (that the game stop state is occurring and that an error is occurring), and therefore, misunderstanding by the player can be prevented.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game stop state in which game cannot be executed (game disabled state, operating state) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a display control means (performance control device 300) that can display on the display device 41 a notification display (operating display 513) that notifies that a game stop state has occurred, and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c that notify that an error has occurred, and when a game stop state occurs while an error is occurring, the display control means is capable of displaying the error display displayed in response to the occurrence of the error even after the game stop state has occurred, and is capable of displaying the notification display (operating display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c at the same time (Figure 102).
That is, even if the game is stopped, if the error continues to occur, the corresponding error display 92a, 92b, 92c continues to be displayed. Therefore, even after the game is stopped, the player can recognize the state of the gaming machine (that the game is stopped and an error is occurring), and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the state.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine capable of executing games, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game stop state (unplayable state, activated state) in which game cannot be executed upon the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, a display control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying, on the display device 41, a notification display (activated display 513) that notifies that a game stop state has occurred and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c that notify that an error has occurred, and a signal output means (game control device 100) that outputs a signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10, and the display control means is capable of displaying the notification display (activated display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c simultaneously (Figure 102), and the signal output means is capable of outputting a signal (security signal) in response to the occurrence of a game stop state (Figure 98).
That is, when the occurrence of a game stop state and an error state overlap, the notification display (operation display 513) and the corresponding error display 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed. Therefore, even after the game stop state, the player can be made aware of the state of the gaming machine (that the game stop state is occurring and that an error is occurring), and therefore, misunderstanding by the player can be prevented.
In addition, when a game stop state occurs, a signal (security signal) is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10, so that the occurrence of the game stop state can be notified to the outside of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in this modified example, when a game stop state occurs together with an error or fraud, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c notifying that an error has occurred are displayed preferentially over the notification display (operation display 513) notifying that a game stop state has occurred.
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and includes a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) capable of generating a game stop state (unplayable state, operating state) in which a game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification display (operating display 513) that notifies the occurrence of a game stop state, and error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c that notify the occurrence of an error, on a display device 41. The display control means is capable of simultaneously displaying the notification display (operation display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c, and when the notification display (operation display 513) and the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed simultaneously, the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c are superimposed on the notification display (operation display 513) and displayed in front of the notification display (operation display 513) (Figure 102).

Therefore, when a game stop state overlaps with an error or fraud, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are superimposed on the notification display (operation display 513) and displayed in front of the notification display (operation display 513), so that the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c can be displayed effectively (specifically, so that the player, etc. can be sure to recognize the state of the gaming machine (that an error is occurring)).
That is, since the visibility of the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c is higher than that when the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed so as to overlap the notification display (operation display 513) and to the rear of the notification display (operation display 513), the player or the like can be surely made aware of the state of the gaming machine even when the safety device is activated and game play is stopped. Also, since the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c are more noticeable than that when the error displays 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed so as not to overlap the notification display (operation display 513), the player or the like can be surely made aware of the state of the gaming machine even when the safety device is activated and game play is stopped.

In this modified example, the payout error displays 92a and 92b are displayed in a manner that allows the player or the attendant of the game arcade to understand the details of the error, so that if there is unpaid game value (unpaid game media) when the game stop state occurs, the player can be notified that the payment of the game value (payment of game media) has not been completed. This makes it possible to urge the player to wait until the payment of the game value (payment of game media) is completed, thereby preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.
As mentioned above, in the game stop state, not only can the special chart change display game and the normal chart change display game not be continued, but also a new special chart change display game and a new normal chart change display game cannot be started. However, in the game stop state, the payout command transmission process (step X107) is not stopped, so the payout of prize balls due to winning that occurred before the game stop state continues. In other words, if the number of unpaid prize balls is not 0 when the game stop state occurs, the payout of prize balls continues until the number of unpaid prize balls becomes 0.

When a game stop state and a payout error occur at the same time, the player may mistakenly believe that payout has stopped and that there are no unpaid prize balls and that payout has been completed, even though payout has stopped due to a payout error, when he sees the operation display 513 that is displayed in response to the game stop state. If the player makes such a mistake, even if there are unpaid prize balls, he may leave the table before winning them, resulting in a disadvantage.
In contrast, in this modified example, when the game stop state and the payout error overlap (when the operation display 513 and the payout error display 92a, 92b are displayed at the same time), the payout error display 92a, 92b is displayed on top of the operation display 513 and in front of the operation display 513. Furthermore, the payout error display 92a, 92b is displayed in a display mode that allows the player and the attendant of the game arcade to grasp the contents of the error, so that even in the game stop state where the safety device is activated, the player can be sure to recognize the state of the gaming machine (that a payout error is occurring). Therefore, even in the game stop state, it is possible to obtain the prize balls that should be paid out, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.
Moreover, since a payout error has a large impact not only on the player but also on the gaming facility, by displaying the payout error displays 92a and 92b in a manner that allows the player and the gaming facility staff to understand the content of the error, it becomes possible to quickly resolve the payout error, which is convenient for the gaming facility.

In addition, in this modified example, even after the game is stopped, monitoring for payout errors continues, as well as for errors and irregularities other than payout errors (such as door open or security system errors). If the game is stopped and an error or irregularity other than a payout error occurs, an other error display 92c notifying errors and irregularities other than a payout error is displayed in front of the operation display 513, superimposed on the operation display 513. Therefore, even in a game stopped state where the safety device is activated, the player can be sure to recognize the state of the gaming machine (that an error or irregularity other than a payout error has occurred). Also, by displaying the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c even in a game stopped state, it can act as a deterrent against irregularities (such as tampering with the board).

In addition, in this modified example, an error code generated as shown in FIG. 103 is displayed as an error display (other error display 92c) for reporting errors or irregularities other than payout errors, so that even if multiple errors or irregularities other than payout errors occur, it is possible to report their occurrence with a single error code. Therefore, even if multiple errors or irregularities other than payout errors occur, it is possible to report this in a concise manner, so that visibility of error displays 92a, 92b, 92c and other displays (displays 513, 515, 516, 517, etc.) can be ensured, and it is possible to provide a display that is highly readable and legible overall.

The errors notified by the error code are not limited to errors other than payout errors and fraud, and the errors notified by text are not limited to payout errors.
Furthermore, the bulb out error display 92a is not limited to the words "bulb out error" but may be other words (for example, "replenishment error, please call an attendant") or a code.
Moreover, the overflow error display 92b is not limited to the words "overflow error" and may be other characters, codes, or the like.
In addition, instead of displaying an error code as the other error display 92c, for example, text (such as "dispensing abnormal error" or "starting port error") may be displayed, similar to the dispensing error displays 92a and 92b.
Furthermore, the operation indication 513 is not limited to the words "playing" but may be other words (for example, "Complete function in operation. The daily payout limit has been reached. Play ends for today") or a code, etc.

In addition, in this modified example, the display mode of the payout error displays 92a and 92b is the same regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10, but is not limited to this. That is, the display mode of the payout error displays 92a and 92b may be different depending on the state of the gaming machine 10 (for example, when the gaming machine 10 is not in a game stop state and when the gaming machine is in a game stop state).
Furthermore, the means for notifying a payout error may be different depending on the state of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, for example, when the game is not stopped, a payout error may be notified by display (the display device 41) and light emission (performance LED), and when the game is stopped, a payout error may be notified by display (the display device 41) and sound (the speakers 19a, 19b).

In addition, in this modified example, the display mode of the other error display 92c is the same regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10, but is not limited to this. That is, the display mode of the other error display 92c may be different depending on the state of the gaming machine 10 (for example, when the gaming machine 10 is not in a game-stopped state and when the gaming machine is in a game-stopped state).
Furthermore, the means for notifying errors or irregularities other than payout errors may be different depending on the state of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, for example, when the game is not stopped, errors or irregularities other than payout errors may be notified by display (display device 41), light emission (performance LED), and sound (speakers 19a, 19b), and when the game is stopped, errors or irregularities other than payout errors may be notified by display (display device 41) and sound (speakers 19a, 19b).

In the example shown in FIG. 102, three error displays, namely, a ball out error display 92a, an overflow error display 92b, and an other error display 92c, are displayed in front of the operation display 513, overlapping it. Of course, if a shoot ball out error has not occurred, the ball out error display 92a will not be displayed, if an overflow error has not occurred, the overflow error display 92b will not be displayed, and if no errors or fraud other than a payout error has occurred, the other error display 92c will not be displayed.

In this modified example, the performance control device 300 uses performance LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10, such as LEDs of decoration devices (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.), to notify the state of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, when a game stop state occurs (when an operating command is received), the performance control device 300 turns on the performance LEDs in a lighting mode for game stop notification, and when an error occurs (when an error/illegal command is received), the performance control device 300 turns on the performance LEDs in a lighting mode for error notification.
In addition, if a game stop state occurs during an error occurrence, the lighting mode of the performance LED is switched from the lighting mode for error notification to the lighting mode for game stop notification. In addition, if an error occurs during a game stop state, the lighting mode for game stop notification continues.
In other words, in this modified example, the lighting mode for notifying a game stop is set to have priority over the lighting mode for notifying an error, but this is not limited to this, and the lighting mode for notifying an error may also be set to have priority over the lighting mode for notifying a game stop.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and includes a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game stop state in which a game cannot be executed (unplayable state, operating state) upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, a display device 41 that can display a notification display (operating display 513) that notifies that a game stop state has occurred, and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c that notify that an error has occurred, and a notification light-emitting mode ( The display device 41 is equipped with a light-emitting device (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.) that can emit light in an error light-emitting mode (lighting mode for notifying a game stop) that notifies that an error has occurred, and when an error occurs during a game stop state, the display device 41 can simultaneously display the notification display (operation display 513) and error displays 92a, 92b, 92c, and the light-emitting device (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.) can emit light in the notification light-emitting mode (lighting mode for notifying a game stop).

That is, when the occurrence of a game stop state and an error state overlap, the notification display (operation display 513) and the corresponding error display 92a, 92b, 92c are displayed. Therefore, even after the game stop state, the player can be made aware of the state of the gaming machine (that the game stop state is occurring and that an error is occurring), and therefore, misunderstanding by the player can be prevented.
Furthermore, even if an error occurs during a game stop state, the light emitting state of the light emitting device does not change from the notification light emitting state (lighting state for notifying a game stop), so that the change in the display on the display device 41 (display of error displays 92a, 92b, 92c) can be made to stand out.

Also, in this modified example, the presentation control device 300 notifies the occurrence of a game stop state (that a game is in a game stop state) using a liquid crystal (such as the display device 41) or a lamp (such as a presentation LED), but does not notify using a sound (such as speakers 19a, 19b). Therefore, if an error occurs during a game stop state, the device starts outputting a corresponding error sound (an error or fraud notification sound) at the time of the error, just as if an error occurs during normal times (when the game is not in a game stop state). Also, if a game stop state occurs while an error sound is being output, the output of that error sound continues.
Also, the error sound may be different in normal times (when the game is not stopped) and when the game is stopped. For example, when an error is notified by a character voice or the like in normal times, the same error sound may be used during the game stop state, or a separate error sound may be prepared and used during the game stop state.

The occurrence of a game stop state (that a game is stopped) may be notified by using a sound (speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). Specifically, for example, when a game stop state occurs, the presentation control device 300 may output a game stop notification sound from speakers 19a, 19b for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the error sound may be prioritized over the game stop notification sound (for example, the volume of the game stop notification sound < the volume of the error sound), the game stop notification sound may be prioritized over the error sound (for example, the volume of the error sound < the volume of the game stop notification sound), or the game stop notification sound and the error sound may have the same priority (for example, the volume of the game stop notification sound = the volume of the error sound).

<<Variations of ending effects during activation warning state>>
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 80(d), the ending performance is executed during the operation warning state, but is not limited to this. For example, as shown in Fig. 104(d) and (e), the ending performance (the ending performance of the big win, the ending performance of the small win) may not be executed during the operation warning state.
This modification will be described with reference to Figure 104. Figures 104(a) to (c) are the same as Figures 80(a) to (c), and therefore their description will be omitted.

In this modified example, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation when it receives an ending command in a non-operation state or an operation notice state, but does not execute an ending presentation when it receives an ending command in an operation warning state, as shown in Figs. 104(d) and (e). That is, when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195,000 during a jackpot, the gaming machine 10 enters an operation warning state (Fig. 104(c)), and then when it receives an ending command, as shown in Fig. 104(d), it "hides the images for the ending presentation" and "mutes the sounds for the ending presentation" from the start of the ending time. However, even if the ending presentation is not executed ("hides the images for the ending presentation" and "mutes the sounds for the ending presentation"), the operation warning display 512 and right hit instruction display 91 continue to be displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (predetermined time<ending time) has elapsed since receiving the ending command, a prompting display 519 (for example, the words "Please remove the prepaid card") urging the user to remove the prepaid card is displayed on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 104 (e).
Thereafter, when the ending time has elapsed (i.e., the special game state (advantageous state) has ended) and the gaming machine 10 has entered a game stop state, an operation display 513 is displayed on the display device 41 as shown in Fig. 104(f). Note that, as in the example shown in Fig. 80, before the operation display 513 is displayed, an operation time movie 514 (see Fig. 80(e)) may be displayed to notify that the safety device has started to be in operation (that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value).

Here, "not executing the ending performance" includes "not displaying the images for the ending performance" and "muting the sounds for the ending performance".
"Hiding the image for the ending effect" may mean not displaying the image for the ending effect (still image, animation image, etc.) and instead displaying another image (in this modified example, a black image (blackout image)), or it may mean displaying the image for the ending effect (still image, animation image, etc.) and displaying another image (in this modified example, a black image (blackout image)) on a layer in front of the image for the ending effect, thereby hiding the image for the ending effect with that other image. In either case, the operation warning display 512 and the right hit instruction display 91 are displayed on a layer in front of the other image (black image).
In addition, "muting the sound for the ending effects" may mean not playing any sound for the ending effects (audio, SE, background music, etc.), or it may mean playing any sound for the ending effects (audio, SE, background music, etc.) and setting the volume of the sound for the ending effects to zero.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is a gaming machine that can execute a game (special chart variable display game) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and can generate advantageous states (big win state, small win state) that are advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a game stop means (safety device (game control device 100)) that can generate a game stop state (unplayable state, operating state) in which the game cannot be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an ending performance execution means (performance control device 300) that can execute an ending performance that suggests the end of the advantageous state during the advantageous state, and if the predetermined condition is established during the advantageous state, the game stop means generates a game stop state after the advantageous state ends, and if the predetermined condition is established during the advantageous state, the ending performance execution means does not execute an ending performance (prohibits the execution of an ending performance) (Figure 104).

Therefore, if a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state (a big win state, a small win state), an ending presentation (a big win ending presentation, a small win ending presentation) is not executed in that advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gameable state continues after the end of the advantageous state.
That is, when a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state, if an ending performance is executed in the same manner as in normal times (when a gameable state continues after the end of an advantageous state), the player may mistakenly believe that the gameable state continues. In particular, when an ending performance is displayed such as "XX RUSH continues" or "V STOCK" or when a sound such as "It's still going on" is output, the player is likely to mistakenly believe that the gameable state continues, and when a game stop state occurs after such a display or sound output, it may lead to distrust. In contrast, in this modified example, when a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state, unlike normal times, an ending performance is not executed, so that it is appealed that it is different from normal times (a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state), so that the player does not mistakenly believe or distrust.

When a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state, the operation warning display 512 is displayed during the advantageous state, and the above-mentioned misconception and distrust can be avoided by the operation warning display 512. However, if everything other than the operation warning display 512 is the same as in normal times (when a gameable state continues after the end of an advantageous state), there is a possibility that the player will not notice the operation warning display 512 (will not notice that a game stop state will occur after the end of an advantageous state). In contrast, in this modified example, when a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state, not only is the operation warning display 512 displayed, but at least a part of everything other than the operation warning display 512 (the ending presentation in this modified example) is different from normal times, so that the possibility of noticing that a game stop state will occur after the end of an advantageous state can be increased, and misconception and distrust can be avoided more effectively.

In addition, "not executing the ending performance" is not limited to performing both "not displaying the images for the ending performance" and "muting the sounds for the ending performance", but may mean performing only one of them.
In addition, "not executing an ending performance" may include, in addition to (or in place of at least one of) "not displaying images for the ending performance" (not executing an ending performance using display device 41) and "muting sounds for the ending performance" (not executing an ending performance using speakers 19a, 19b), "turning off decorations for the ending performance" (not executing an ending performance using performance LEDs), etc.

Here, "hiding the image for the ending effect" means hiding the image for the normal ending effect (the ending effect executed when the playable state continues after the special game state ends, i.e., the ending effect in a state other than the activation warning state (non-activated state, activation notice state)). In other words, it can be said that the other image (for example, a black image) is an image for the ending effect dedicated to the activation warning state.
Also, "Mute the sound for the ending performance" means to mute the sound for the normal ending performance. In other words, it can be said that silence (a state in which the sound for the ending performance is not being played, and the volume of the sound for the ending performance is zero) is the sound for the ending performance dedicated to the operation warning state.
In addition, "turning off the decoration for the ending performance" means turning off the decoration for the normal ending performance. In other words, turning off the decoration for the ending performance is exclusive to the activation warning state.
Therefore, "The ending performance execution means does not execute an ending performance if the specified condition is satisfied during the special game state" can be rephrased as "The ending performance execution means executes a specific ending performance (an ending performance dedicated to the activation warning state) rather than executing a normal ending performance if the specified condition is satisfied during the special game state."

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example is equipped with an alarm means (presentation control device 300) capable of issuing an alarm regarding a game stop state (unplayable state, operating state), and when the specified condition is met during an advantageous state (jackpot state, small win state), the alarm means is capable of notifying that a game stop state will occur after the advantageous state ends (Figure 104).
Therefore, if a game stop state occurs after the end of an advantageous state (a big win state, a small win state), this fact will be notified during the advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the game will continue in a playable state after the advantageous state ends.
Here, the "notification regarding a game stop state" refers to, for example, the display of safety device related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513).
In addition, "notifying that a game stop state will occur after the advantageous state ends" refers to, for example, displaying an operation warning display 512 (Figure 104 (c)).

In addition, in this modified example, the performance control device 300 notifies the state of the gaming machine 10 using performance LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the decoration devices (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). Specifically, when an operation warning state occurs (when an operation warning command is received), the performance control device 300 lights up the performance LEDs in a lighting mode for operation warning notification. When a game stop state occurs (when an operation command is received), the performance LEDs are turned on in a lighting mode for game stop notification, and when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the performance LEDs are all turned off. When an error occurs (when an error/illegal command is received), the performance LEDs are turned on in a lighting mode for error notification.

In addition, the lighting pattern for the operation warning notification, the lighting pattern for the game stop notification, and the lighting pattern for the error notification may be the same pattern (for example, flashing red at 500 millisecond intervals), or at least one of the lighting pattern for the operation warning notification, the lighting pattern for the game stop notification, and the lighting pattern for the error notification may be different patterns.
In addition, in this modified example, the lighting mode for notifying a game stop is set to have priority over the lighting mode for notifying an error, but this is not limited to this, and the lighting mode for notifying an error may be set to have priority over the lighting mode for notifying a game stop.
In addition, in this modified example, the lighting mode for error notification is set to have priority over the lighting mode for operation warning notification, but this is not limited to this, and the lighting mode for operation warning notification may also be set to have priority over the lighting mode for error notification.

Furthermore, the activation warning display 512 is not limited to the words "Play will stop after the winnings end", but may be other words (for example, "The complete function will be activated after the winnings end") or a code, etc.
Furthermore, the operation indication 513 is not limited to the words "playing" but may be other words (for example, "Complete function in operation. The daily payout limit has been reached. Play ends for today") or a code, etc.
Furthermore, the prompting display 519 is not limited to the text "Please remove the prepaid card" and may be, for example, the text and an image (for example, an image imitating the appearance of removing the prepaid card).

104, the activation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap the right hit instruction display 91 (see FIGS. 104(c), (d), and (e)), but this is not limited thereto, and the activation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap the right hit instruction display 91. In other words, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap the right hit instruction display 91 and be closer to the right hit instruction display 91 than the right hit instruction display 91, or the activation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap the right hit instruction display 91 and be closer to the right hit instruction display 91 than the right hit instruction display 91.
In addition, during the activation warning state, the display position of the activation warning display 512 relative to the right-hit instruction display 91 may be different before and after the ending command is received.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 105, before an ending command is received in the activation warning state, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a position overlapping the right-hit instruction display 91 (see Figure 105 (c)), and then, when an ending command is received, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a position not overlapping the right-hit instruction display 91 (see Figures 105 (d) and (e)).
In this modified example, the round performance and the interval performance are executed even in the activation warning state, so that before receiving an ending command, the activation warning display 512 is displayed so as to overlap with the right hit instruction display 91, thereby improving the visibility of the image for the round performance and the image for the interval performance (reducing the area of the part of the image for the round performance and the image for the interval performance that is hidden by the activation warning display 512 and the right hit instruction display 91). On the other hand, since the ending performance is not executed in the activation warning state, even if the activation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap with the right hit instruction display 91 during the ending time, the activation warning display 512 and the right hit instruction display 91 do not interfere with other performances. Also, by displaying the activation warning display 512 so as not to overlap with the right hit instruction display 91, the visibility of both can be ensured.

In the example shown in Figure 105, as shown in Figure 105 (c), the activation warning display 512 is displayed in a position overlapping part of the right-hit instruction display 91, but this is not limited to this, and the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a position overlapping the entire right-hit instruction display 91.
In addition, in the example shown in Figure 105, as shown in Figure 105 (b), the activation warning display 511 is displayed in a position that does not overlap the right-hit instruction display 91, but this is not limited to this, and the activation warning display 511 may be displayed in a position that overlaps part or all of the right-hit instruction display 91.

Furthermore, when an ending command is received in the activation warning state, in addition to "hiding the images for the ending performance", it is also possible to hide other images (still images, animation images, etc.) For example, when an ending command is received in the activation warning state, "the images for the ending performance are hidden", the right hit instruction display 91 may be hidden, and the display of the activation warning display 512 may continue.
In addition, if the images for the ending performance include a specific image (for example, a warning image to prevent addiction), when "hide images for the ending performance", all images for the ending performance except for the specific image are hidden, and the specific image is displayed as usual (not hidden).
In addition, when an ending command is received in an operation warning state, in addition to "muting the sounds for the ending performance," it is also possible to mute other sounds (voice, SE, BGM, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example, when "the image for the ending effect is not displayed", a black image (blackout image) is displayed as the other image, but this is not limited to this. The other image can be any image that is different from the image for the normal ending effect (the image for the ending effect displayed when the playable state continues after the end of the special game state), and it is preferable that the image is not one that gives the expectation that the playable state will continue after the end of the special game state. For example, it may be an image that suggests that a game stop state will occur after the end of the special game state.
104 and 105, the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are not displayed, but the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c can be displayed even while the "images for ending effects are not displayed". Also, it is preferable that the error displays 92a, 92b, and 92c are displayed in a layer (e.g., the top layer) in front of the operation warning display 512 even while the "images for ending effects are not displayed".

As mentioned above, when the RAM is initialized (when the power is turned on with RAM clearing), the operation of the safety device is released by clearing the safety device operation flag area to 0, but when the power is turned on normally (when the power is turned on without RAM clearing), the safety device operation flag area is not cleared. Therefore, if a power outage occurs during operation and is restored (when the power is turned on normally), the device will remain in operation (game stopped state) even after restoration.
Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system so that if a power outage occurs during the operation warning state and is restored (normal power on), the operation warning state continues even after restoration. In that case, in the process at the time of normal power on (step X44, steps X48 to X51), if the operation state is in progress (step X50; Y), the game control device 100 may execute a process (step X51) of transmitting a command indicating that the safety device is in operation to the performance control device 300, and if the operation warning state is in progress, a process of transmitting a command indicating that the operation warning state is in the performance control device 300 may be executed.

Furthermore, when the performance control device 300 receives an ending command after receiving the command during the operation warning, that is, when a power outage occurs between the occurrence of the operation warning state and the reception of the ending command, the performance control device 300 may display the screen shown in Fig. 104(d) on the display device 41 in response to the reception of the command during the operation warning. In other words, when the power outage is restored during the operation warning state, the screen shown in Fig. 104(d) may be displayed again even before the start of the ending time.
In addition, when the power outage is restored during the operation warning state, the screen may be restored to, for example, the screen shown in Fig. 104(e) instead of the screen shown in Fig. 104(d). Alternatively, when the power outage is restored during the operation warning state, the screen may be restored at the same timing as when the power outage is restored during a normal jackpot (during a jackpot when the operation warning state is not in effect), instead of restoring the screen to the screen shown in Fig. 104(d) in response to receiving a command during the operation warning.

In this modified example, when power is restored during a normal jackpot (a jackpot when not in an operational warning state), the screen will return to the ending (for example, to the waiting for customers screen or the game start screen) regardless of the timing of when the power is restored.
In addition, when the power is restored during a normal jackpot, the timing of the screen restoration may be varied depending on the timing of the power restoration. Specifically, for example, if the power restoration occurs before the reception of a round command, the screen may be restored (for example, to the round screen) in response to the reception of the round command. In addition, if the power restoration occurs before the reception of an interval command, the screen may be restored (for example, to the interval screen) in response to the reception of an interval command. In addition, if the power restoration occurs before the reception of an ending command, the screen may be restored (for example, to the ending screen) in response to the reception of an ending command.
As described above, except for when the game is stopped due to a RAM abnormality (steps X25 to X29), when the power is turned on, the safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is initialized (cleared) unconditionally. The operation warning display 512 of this modified example does not include a display including "XX remaining until operation", etc., so it can be displayed when the power is restored, but a display including "XX remaining until operation", etc. is not displayed when the power is restored.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and various modifications and variations are possible within the scope of the technical concept, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is possible to replace the time-saving state with a probability-changing state. For example, it is also possible to combine multiple embodiments and multiple modifications in various ways. Furthermore, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines, but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and it is intended to include all modifications within the scope of the claims and the meaning and content equivalent thereto.

For example, when the above-mentioned embodiment and modified examples are applied to a slot machine, the gaming media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of gaming balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced by the number of medals paid out. The number of gaming media used is the number of medals inserted, which is the number of medals inserted into the slot machine. In a slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the bonus ratio is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out through various bonuses to the number of medals paid out in a specified period.

10 Game machine 18 Frame decoration device (light-emitting device)
46 Board decoration device (light-emitting device)
41 Display device 92a Bulb out error display (error display)
92b Overflow error display (error display)
92c Other error display (error display)
100 Game control device (game stop means)
300 Performance control device (display control means, ending performance execution means, signal output means, notification means)
513 Operation display (alert display)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game,
a game stopping means capable of generating a game disabled state in which a game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A display control means capable of displaying, on a display device, a notification display notifying the occurrence of the game impossible state and an error display notifying the occurrence of an error;
A signal output means for outputting a signal to an outside of the gaming machine,
The display control means
The notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time,
The signal output means is
A gaming machine capable of outputting a signal in response to the occurrence of the unplayable state.

Images